《大念处经》的注释
9. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
总说章节的注释
Uddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
373“如是我闻”这句,就是《大念处经》。这里先对其中新出现的词句作注释:世尊为什么说“诸比丘,这是一条唯一的道路”这部经呢?因为俱卢国的人民有能力接受甚深的教法。据说,俱卢国的比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女,由于时节、资具等条件圆满,受用该国适宜的时节和资具,身体常常健康,内心也常常调柔。他们因为身心调柔,得到智慧力的资助,所以能够领受甚深的法谈。世尊看到他们有能力接受甚深教法,就在二十一处把业处导入阿拉汉道,宣说了这部义理甚深的《大念处经》。就像一个人得到金篮,便把各种花放进去;或者得到金宝箱,便把七种宝物放进去;同样,世尊得到俱卢国的大众,便宣说了甚深教法。也正因为这样,世尊在这里还宣说了其他义理甚深的经典,比如《长部》里的《大因缘经》,《中部》里的《念处经》《心材譬喻经》《树譬喻经》《拉塔巴拉经》《玛甘迪亚经》《不动适宜经》等。
373.Evaṃme sutanti mahāsatipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamapubbapadavaṇṇanā – ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggoti kasmā bhagavā idaṃ suttamabhāsi? Kururaṭṭhavāsīnaṃ gambhīradesanāpaṭiggahaṇasamatthatāya. Kururaṭṭhavāsino kira bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo utupaccayādisampannattā tassa raṭṭhassa sappāyautupaccayasevanena niccaṃ kallasarīrā kallacittā ca honti. Te cittasarīrakallatāya anuggahitapaññābalā gambhīrakathaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ samatthā honti. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā imaṃ gambhīradesanāpaṭiggahaṇasamatthataṃ sampassanto ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu kammaṭṭhānaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvā idaṃ gambhīratthaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ abhāsi. Yathā hi puriso suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakaṃ labhitvā tattha nānāpupphāni pakkhipeyya, suvaṇṇamañjūsaṃ vā pana labhitvā sattaratanāni pakkhipeyya, evaṃ bhagavā kururaṭṭhavāsiparisaṃ labhitvā gambhīradesanaṃ desesi. Tenevettha aññānipi gambhīratthāni imasmiṃ dīghanikāye mahānidānaṃ majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānaṃ, sāropamaṃ, rukkhopamaṃ, raṭṭhapālaṃ, māgaṇḍiyaṃ, āneñjasappāyanti aññānipi suttāni desesi.
再说,在那个地区,四众弟子本来就一向致力于念处的修习,就连奴仆、佣人也只谈论和念处有关的话题。在水边渡口、纺线的地方等场所,根本不会有无意义的闲谈。如果有什么女人被问到:“大姐,你作意哪一种念处?”她回答“什么也没有”,大家就会责备她:“你的命真可悲!你虽然活着,却和死人一样。”然后劝诫她“从今以后别再这样了”,并让她学会某一种念处。如果她说“我作意某某念处”,大家就赞叹说“萨度!萨度!”并称赞她:“你的生命活得真好,你才算真正得到了人身,正自觉者就是为你而出世的!”等等。而且在这里,不只是人类致力于念处作意,连依止他们而住的畜生道众生也是如此。
Apica tasmiṃ janapade catasso parisā pakatiyāva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, antamaso dāsakammakaraparijānāpi satipaṭṭhānapaṭisaṃyuttameva kathaṃ kathenti. Udakatitthasuttakantanaṭṭhānādīsupi niratthakakathā nāma nappavattati. Sace kāci itthī ‘‘amma, tvaṃ kataraṃ satipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ manasikarosī’’ti pucchitā ‘‘na kiñcī’’ti vadati, taṃ garahanti ‘‘dhiratthu tava jīvitaṃ, jīvamānāpi tvaṃ matasadisā’’ti. Atha naṃ ‘‘mā dāni puna evamakāsī’’ti ovaditvā aññataraṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhāpenti. Yā pana ‘‘ahaṃ asukasatipaṭṭhānaṃ nāma manasikaromī’’ti vadati, tassā ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti sādhukāraṃ katvā ‘‘tava jīvitaṃ sujīvitaṃ, tvaṃ nāma manussattaṃ pattā, tavatthāya sammāsambuddho uppanno’’tiādīhi pasaṃsanti. Na kevalañcettha manussajātikāva satipaṭṭhānamanasikārayuttā, te nissāya viharantā tiracchānagatāpi.
这件事的经过是这样的:据说有个戏子带着一只鹦鹉幼雏,到处走动着训练它。他住在比丘尼寺院附近,要走的时候把那只鹦鹉幼雏忘了,就离开了。沙弥尼们把它捡来,细心照料,给它取名叫“佛护”。有一天,大长老尼看见它坐在自己面前,就叫道:“佛护!”它应道:“什么事,圣尼?”长老尼问:“你有没有什么修行的作意?”它答:“没有,圣尼。”长老尼说:“贤友,住在出家众身边的人,可不能放任自己糊里糊涂地过日子,总该有点作意才行。别的你大概也做不来,那你就念诵‘骨、骨’吧。”它就听从长老尼的教导,时时念诵“骨、骨”。
Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira naṭako suvapotakaṃ gahetvā sikkhāpento vicarati. So bhikkhunupassayaṃ upanissāya vasitvā gamanakāle suvapotakaṃ pamussitvā gato. Taṃ sāmaṇeriyo gahetvā paṭijaggiṃsu. Buddharakkhito tissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Taṃ ekadivasaṃ purato nisinnaṃ disvā mahātherī āha – ‘‘buddharakkhitā’’ti. Kiṃ, ayyeti? Atthi te koci bhāvanāmanasikāroti? Natthi, ayyeti. Āvuso, pabbajitānaṃ santike vasantena nāma vissaṭṭhaattabhāvena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭati, kocideva manasikāro icchitabbo, tvaṃ pana aññaṃ na sakkhissasi, ‘‘aṭṭhi aṭṭhī’’ti sajjhāyaṃ karohīti. So theriyā ovāde ṭhatvā ‘‘aṭṭhi aṭṭhī’’ti sajjhāyanto carati.
有一天清晨,它坐在门楼的顶上晒着初升的太阳,一只鸟用爪子把它抓住了。它发出“叽叽叽”的叫声。沙弥尼们听到后,说:“尊者,佛护被鸟抓走了,我们把它救回来!”就拿起土块等东西追上去,把它救了下来。带回来以后,把它放在长老尼面前,长老尼问道:“佛护,被鸟抓住的时候,你心里想了什么?”它回答:“尊者,我什么也没想,只是这样想:一堆骨头抓着另一堆骨头飞走,不知道会在什么地方散落。尊者,我就只想着那堆骨头。”长老尼说:“萨度,萨度,佛护,这将成为你未来灭尽诸有的助缘。”就这样,连畜生道的众生也致力于念处的作意。因此,世尊为了让它们生起念处的智慧,宣说了这部经。
Taṃ ekadivasaṃ pātova toraṇagge nisīditvā bālātapaṃ tapamānaṃ eko sakuṇo nakhapañjarena aggahesi. So ‘‘kiri kirī’’ti saddamakāsi. Sāmaṇeriyo sutvā ‘‘ayye buddharakkhito sakuṇena gahito, mocema na’’nti leḍḍuādīni gahetvā anubandhitvā mocesuṃ . Taṃ ānetvā purato ṭhapitaṃ therī āha – ‘‘buddharakkhita, sakuṇena gahitakāle kiṃ cintesī’’ti? Na, ayye, aññaṃ kiñci cintesiṃ, aṭṭhipuñjova aṭṭhipuñjaṃ gahetvā gacchati, katarasmiṃ ṭhāne vippakirissatīti, evaṃ ayye aṭṭhipuñjameva cintesinti. Sādhu, sādhu, buddharakkhita, anāgate bhavakkhayassa te paccayo bhavissatīti. Evaṃ tattha tiracchānagatāpi satipaṭṭhānamanasikārayuttā. Tasmā nesaṃ bhagavā satipaṭṭhānabuddhimeva janento idaṃ suttamabhāsi.
在这里,“唯一道路”就是指单一的道路。因为对于“道”——
Tattha ekāyanoti ekamaggo. Maggassa hi –
“道、路、途、径、直道、车道。
船、渡桥、筏和泅渡桥。”
‘‘Maggo pantho patho pajjo, añjasaṃ vaṭumāyanaṃ; Nāvā uttarasetū ca, kullo ca bhisisaṅkamo’’ti.
“道”有很多名称。这里它是用“行走”这个名字来说的。所以,对于“诸比丘,这是一乘道”这句话,应当这样理解:诸比丘,这是唯一的道,不是分成两条的路。或者也可以说,因为要由一个人来行走,所以叫一乘道。“由一个人”,意思是舍弃众人结伴,独自远离,心处于隔绝状态。应当行走,就是应当去实践、去修行。或者说,众生通过它来行走,所以叫“行道”,意思是从轮回走向涅槃。“一个人的行道”就是一乘道。“一个人的”,指的是最殊胜的人。世尊是一切众生中最殊胜的,所以说这话指的就是世尊。虽然其他人也通过它行走,但即便如此,它仍是世尊的行道,因为是由世尊开创的。正如经中所说:“婆罗门,世尊正是那未生之道的开创者……”等等。或者,“它行走”,所以叫“行道”,意思是运行、持续进行。“在唯一之中行走”,所以叫一乘道,意思是只在这法与律中运行,不在别处。正如经中所说:“苏跋达,只有在这法与律中,才能找到八支圣道。”这只是教说方式的不同,从意义上看,其实就是一个。此外,趣向于单一,故为一乘道。在前阶段虽以种种门径和修习方式而进行,在后阶段则只趣向于唯一的涅槃,这是所说的意思。正如娑婆主梵天所说——
Bahūni nāmāni. Svāyamidha ayananāmena vutto, tasmā ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggoti ettha ekamaggo ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo na dvidhā pathabhūtoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā ekena ayitabboti ekāyano. Ekenāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya vūpakaṭṭhena pavivittacittena. Ayitabbo paṭipajjitabbo, ayanti vā etenāti ayano, saṃsārato nibbānaṃ gacchantīti attho. Ekassa ayano ekāyano. Ekassāti seṭṭhassa. Sabbasattaseṭṭho ca bhagavā, tasmā bhagavatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiñcāpi hi tena aññepi ayanti, evaṃ santepi bhagavatova so ayano tena uppāditattā. Yathāha ‘‘so hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.79). Ayatīti vā ayano, gacchati pavattatīti attho. Ekasmiṃ ayanoti ekāyano, imasmiññeva dhammavinaye pavattati, na aññatthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘imasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). Desanābhedoyeva heso, atthato pana ekova. Apica ekaṃ ayatīti ekāyano. Pubbabhāge nānāmukhabhāvanānayappavattopi aparabhāge ekaṃ nibbānameva gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha brahmā sahampati –
彻见生死尽头、心怀利乐悲悯者,
了知此一乘之道、独一径直之途。
往昔即由此道得渡,
当渡、正渡者,亦将由此渡越瀑流。
Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, Tarissanti ye ca taranti oghanti. (saṃ. ni. 5.409);
有些人根据“不会第二次到达彼岸”这个偈颂的说法,认为这条路只走一次就能到达涅槃,所以把它叫做“一乘道”,这是说不通的。因为这里的含义应该用“只走一次”这样的词来表达。如果把意思解释成“它只有一次行走、只有一种去向和运作”,这样在字面上也许能凑合,但在意义上两边都说不通。为什么呢?因为这里指的是前行道。以身体等四种所缘而运作的前行念处道,才是这里所指的,不是出世间道;而且这条路是要走很多次的,也有很多种走法。
Keci pana ‘‘na pāraṃ diguṇaṃ yantī’’ti gāthānayena yasmā ekavāraṃ nibbānaṃ gacchati, tasmā ‘‘ekāyano’’ti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. Imassa hi atthassa sakiṃ ayanoti iminā byañjanena bhavitabbaṃ. Yadi pana ekaṃ ayanamassa ekā gati pavattīti evaṃ atthaṃ yojetvā vucceyya, byañjanaṃ yujjeyya, attho pana ubhayathāpi na yujjati. Kasmā? Idha pubbabhāgamaggassa adhippetattā. Kāyādicatuārammaṇappavatto hi pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo idhādhippeto, na lokuttaro, so ca anekavārampi ayati, anekañcassa ayanaṃ hoti.
从前,关于这个句子,大长老们之间也有过讨论。持三藏的秋喇那嘎长老说:“这是前行念处道。”但他的老师持三藏的小须摩长老说:“这是混合道。”
“尊者,是前行部分吗?”
“贤友,是混合的。”老师再三这样说时,他没有反驳,只是沉默。他们没有把这个问题解决就起身了。后来,老师长老在去浴室的路上,心里想:“我说是混合道,小龙却主张前行道,这里的定论到底是什么?”他从头翻阅经典,翻到“诸比丘,如果有人这样修习四念处七年”这个地方时,留意到了。他想:出世间道生起后,不可能持续七年;我所说的混合道站不住脚,只有小龙所见的前行道才站得住脚。于是在初八诵法宣唱时,他就去了。
Pubbepi ca imasmiṃ pade mahātherānaṃ sākacchā ahosiyeva. Tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggoti āha. Ācariyo panassa tipiṭakacūḷasumatthero missakamaggoti āha. Pubbabhāgo bhanteti? Missako, āvusoti. Ācariye pana punappunaṃ bhaṇante appaṭibāhitvā tuṇhī ahosi. Pañhaṃ avinicchinitvāva uṭṭhahiṃsu. Athācariyatthero nahānakoṭṭhakaṃ gacchanto ‘‘mayā missakamaggo kathito, cūḷanāgo pubbabhāgamaggoti ādāya voharati, ko nu kho ettha nicchayo’’ti suttantaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya parivattento ‘‘yo hi koci , bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṃ bhāveyya satta vassānī’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne sallakkhesi. Lokuttaramaggo uppajjitvā satta vassāni tiṭṭhamāno nāma natthi, mayā vutto missakamaggo na labbhati. Cūḷanāgena diṭṭho pubbabhāgamaggova labbhatīti ñatvā aṭṭhamiyaṃ dhammasavane saṅghuṭṭhe agamāsi.
据说,古长老们天生就爱听佛法,一听到声音就立刻涌进去,嘴里喊着“我第一,我第一”。那天正好轮到秋喇那嘎长老说法,他坐上法座,拿起扇子。前面的偈颂诵完后,站在长老座位后面的人这样想:“我不能私下坐着不说。”古长老们确实没有嫉妒心,不会像举起一捆甘蔗那样,只把自己喜欢的东西抬出来到处走。他们只采纳有根据的,舍弃没根据的。所以那位长老喊道:“贤友,小龙!”秋喇那嘎长老听到声音,就像听到老师的声音一样,立刻停下说法,问道:“尊者,怎么了?”长老说:“贤友,小龙,我所说的混合道站不住脚,你所说的前行念处道才站得住脚。”秋喇那嘎长老心想:“我们的老师通达一切教理,持诵三藏,智慧如佛,连这样的比丘都被这个问题弄糊涂了,将来我的同门兄弟们一定也会被这个问题弄糊涂。”于是他取出经典,要从《无碍解道》中把这个问题确定下来:“所谓一乘道,就是前行念处道。”
Porāṇakattherā kira piyadhammasavanā honti, saddaṃ sutvāva ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ, ahaṃ paṭhama’’nti ekappahāreneva osaranti. Tasmiñca divase cūḷanāgattherassa vāro, tena dhammāsane nisīditvā bījaniṃ gahetvā pubbagāthāsu vuttāsu therassa āsanapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhitassa etadahosi – ‘‘raho nisīditvā na vakkhāmī’’ti. Porāṇakattherā hi anusūyakā honti. Na attano rucimeva ucchubhāraṃ viya evaṃ ukkhipitvā vicaranti, kāraṇameva gaṇhanti, akāraṇaṃ vissajjenti. Tasmā thero ‘‘āvuso, cūḷanāgā’’ti āha. So ācariyassa viya saddoti dhammaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante’’ti āha. Āvuso, cūḷanāga, mayā vutto missakamaggo na labbhati, tayā vutto pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggova labbhatīti. Thero cintesi – ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo sabbapariyattiko tepiṭako sutabuddho, evarūpassāpi nāma bhikkhuno ayaṃ pañho āluḷeti, anāgate mama bhātikā imaṃ pañhaṃ āluḷessantīti suttaṃ gahetvā imaṃ pañhaṃ niccalaṃ karissāmī’’ti paṭisambhidāmaggato ‘‘ekāyanamaggo vuccati pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo’’.
在诸道中,八支圣道最殊胜;在诸谛中,四谛最殊胜。
离欲在一切法中最为殊胜,在两足众生中,具眼者最为殊胜。
唯此是道,别无他途,为令见清净;
你们要走上这条路,它能摧毁魔王的军队。
你们依照这个去修行,就能彻底终结苦。
Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho, saccānaṃ caturo padā; Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ, dvipadānañca cakkhumā. Eseva maggo natthañño, dassanassa visuddhiyā; Etañhi tumhe paṭipajjatha, mārasenappamaddanaṃ; Etañhi tumhe paṭipannā, dukkhassantaṃ karissathāti. –
他取来这部经,然后把它放在那里。
Suttaṃ āharitvā ṭhapesi.
“道”是在什么意义上称为道?因为它的意义是趣向涅槃,也是因为追求涅槃的人应当寻求它。为了众生的清净:是为了让那些内心被贪等污垢、被贪欲和不正贪等随烦恼染污的众生得到清净。确实,正是通过这条道,距今四大阿僧祇劫加十万劫前,在同一劫中出世的以爱作佛、慧作佛、归依作佛、燃灯佛为开端、以释迦牟尼为最后的许多正自觉者、数百位独觉佛,以及多到无法计算的圣弟子——这一切众生都除去了内心的污垢,达到了最极清净。不过,若从色法的污垢来说,根本不存在杂染与清净的施设。正如:
Maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānagamanaṭṭhena nibbānatthikehi magganīyaṭṭhena ca. Sattānaṃ visuddhiyāti rāgādīhi malehi abhijjhāvisamalobhādīhi ca upakkilesehi kiliṭṭhacittānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhatthāya. Tathā hi imināva maggena ito satasahassakappādhikānaṃ catunnaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānaṃ upari ekasmiṃyeva kappe nibbatte taṇhaṅkaramedhaṅkarasaraṇaṅkaradīpaṅkaranāmake buddhe ādiṃ katvā sakyamunipariyosānā aneke sammāsambuddhā anekasatā paccekabuddhā gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā ariyasāvakā cāti ime sattā sabbe cittamalaṃ pavāhetvā paramavisuddhiṃ pattā. Rūpamalavasena pana saṃkilesavodānapaññattiyeva natthi. Tathā hi –
“青年们被染污的色所染污;
诸色清净,他们便得清净——这不是大仙所说的。
心被染污了,青年们就跟着染污;
心清净了,人就清净,这是大仙所说的。”
‘‘Rūpena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Rūpe suddhe visujjhanti, anakkhātaṃ mahesinā. Cittena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Citte suddhe visujjhanti, iti vuttaṃ mahesinā’’.
正如经中所说:比丘们,因为心被染污,众生就被染污;因为心清净,众生就清净。而这种心的清净,是通过这条念处的道路达成的。所以他说,是为了众生的清净。
Yathāha – ‘‘cittasaṃkilesā, bhikkhave, sattā saṃkilissanti, cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti. Tañca cittavodānaṃ iminā satipaṭṭhānamaggena hoti. Tenāha ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti.
为了超越愁与悲:意思是,为了超越、断除愁和悲。因为修习这条道,能导向超越愁,就像散他提大臣等人那样;也能导向超越悲,就像巴塔佳拉等人那样。所以他说“为了超越愁与悲”。虽然散他提大臣……
Sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyāti sokassa ca paridevassa ca samatikkamāya pahānāyāti attho, ayañhi maggo bhāvito santatimahāmattādīnaṃ viya sokasamatikkamāya, paṭācārādīnaṃ viya paridevasamatikkamāya saṃvattati. Tenāha ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’ti. Kiñcāpi hi santatimahāmatto –
“过去的事,你要净化掉;以后,你不要有任何挂碍。
如果你对中间也不执取,就能寂静地生活。”
‘‘Yaṃ pubbe taṃ visodhehi, pacchā te mātu kiñcanaṃ; Majjhe ce no gahessasi, upasanto carissasī’’ti. (su. ni. 945);
听完这首偈颂,他当下就同时证得了四无碍解和阿拉汉果。巴塔佳拉——
Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvāva saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patto. Paṭācārā –
“儿子救不了你,父亲也救不了你,亲戚同样救不了你。
被死神控制的人,在亲人当中也找不到庇护。”
‘‘Na santi puttā tāṇāya, na pitā nāpi bandhavā; Antakenādhipannassa, natthi ñātīsu tāṇatā’’ti. (dha. pa. 288);
她听完这首偈颂后,就证入了入流果。不过,如果不去取身、受、心、法中的任何一种法作为所缘,就谈不上真正的修习。因此应当知道,他们也是依靠这条道而超越了愁与悲。
Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitā. Yasmā pana kāyavedanācittadhammesu kañci dhammaṃ anāmasitvā bhāvanā nāma natthi, tasmā tepi imināva maggena sokaparideve samatikkantāti veditabbā.
“苦与忧的灭尽”是指身体的苦和心里的忧——这两者的灭尽、止息。这个道如果修习了,就能导向苦的灭尽,就像底沙长老等人那样;也能导向忧的灭尽,就像帝释天神等人那样。
Dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāyāti kāyikadukkhassa cetasikadomanassassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ atthaṅgamāya, nirodhāyāti attho. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito tissattherādīnaṃ viya dukkhassa, sakkādīnaṃ viya ca domanassassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattati.
这里解释一下它的含义:据说在舍卫城里,有个富家子弟名叫底沙,他舍弃了四十亿金钱,出家后住在没有村庄的山林中。他弟弟的妻子派了五百个盗贼去,说:“你们去,把他杀掉。”那些盗贼去了以后,把长老团团围住,坐了下来。长老问:“近事男们,你们为什么来?”他们说:“我们要取你的性命。”长老说:“近事男们,请收下我的担保,让我活过今晚。”盗贼说:“沙门,在这个地方,谁能给你做担保?”长老拿起一块大石头,砸断了自己的两条大腿骨,说道:“近事男们,这样能算担保吗?”他们便退到一边,在经行道的尽头生了火,躺下休息。长老压制住身体的痛苦感受,省察自己的戒行,依靠清净的戒,生起了喜悦和欢欣。然后他依次增长观智,整夜修习沙门法,在曙光升起时证得阿拉汉果,说出了这首感兴偈:
Tatrāyaṃ atthadīpanā – sāvatthiyaṃ kira tisso nāma kuṭumbikaputto cattālīsa hiraññakoṭiyo pahāya pabbajitvā agāmake araññe viharati. Tassa kaniṭṭhabhātu bhariyā ‘‘gacchatha, naṃ jīvitā voropethā’’ti pañcasate core pesesi. Te gantvā theraṃ parivāretvā nisīdiṃsu. Thero āha – ‘‘kasmā āgatattha upāsakā’’ti? Taṃ jīvitā voropessāmāti. Pāṭibhogaṃ me upāsakā, gahetvā ajjekarattiṃ jīvitaṃ dethāti. Ko te, samaṇa, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāṭibhogo bhavissatīti? Thero mahantaṃ pāsāṇaṃ gahetvā dve ūruṭṭhīni bhinditvā ‘‘vaṭṭati upāsakā pāṭibhogo’’ti āha. Te apakkamitvā caṅkamanasīse aggiṃ katvā nipajjiṃsu. Therassa vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā sīlaṃ paccavekkhato parisuddhaṃ sīlaṃ nissāya pītipāmojjaṃ uppajji. Tato anukkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento tiyāmarattiṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā aruṇuggamane arahattaṃ patto imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
“折断双足之后,我将使你们明白。
我厌烦,我羞愧——我竟然带着贪爱去死。
我这样思惟之后,就如实地去观照。
天刚亮的时候,我就证得了阿拉汉果。”
‘‘Ubho pādāni bhinditvā, saññapessāmi vo ahaṃ; Aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi, sarāgamaraṇaṃ ahaṃ. Evāhaṃ cintayitvāna, yathābhūtaṃ vipassisaṃ; Sampatte aruṇuggamhi, arahattamapāpuṇi’’nti.
还有另外三十位比丘,从世尊面前取得业处后,进入森林住处结夏安居。他们互相约定说:“贤友们,在这整夜之中,只应当修沙门法,不要互相到对方那里去。”说完就这样住下。他们修沙门法之后,在黎明时分打瞌睡时,一只老虎走来,一个接一个地把比丘叼走。谁也没有喊出“老虎抓我”这样的话。就这样,当五位、十位比丘被吃掉后,到了伍波萨他日,他们问:“贤友们,其余的人到哪里去了?”知道之后,又说:“从现在起,谁被抓了就该说‘我被抓了’。”说完就这样住下。后来,一只老虎又像之前那样抓住了一位年轻比丘。他说:“尊者,老虎!”比丘们拿起棍棒和火把,想把他救出来,就追了上去。老虎爬上比丘们无法攀登的断崖,从那位比丘的脚趾开始吃起。其他比丘说:“贤友,现在我们已经无能为力了。比丘的殊胜,正是在这样的境地中才能看出来。”那位比丘躺在虎口里,压制着那种感受,增长观智,当被吃到脚踝时证得入流果,被吃到膝盖时证得一来果,被吃到肚脐时证得不来果,在心脏还没被吃之前,就与无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果,然后说出这首优陀那:
Aparepi tiṃsa bhikkhū bhagavato santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā araññavihāre vassaṃ upagantvā ‘‘āvuso, tiyāmarattiṃ samaṇadhammova kātabbo, na aññamaññassa santikaṃ āgantabba’’nti vatvā vihariṃsu. Tesaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā paccūsasamaye pacalāyantānaṃ eko byaggho āgantvā ekekaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā gacchati. Na koci ‘‘maṃ byaggho gaṇhī’’ti vācampi nicchāresi. Evaṃ pañcasu dasasu bhikkhūsu khāditesu uposathadivase ‘‘itare, āvuso , kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ñatvā ca ‘‘idāni gahitena gahitomhīti vattabba’’nti vatvā vihariṃsu . Atha aññataraṃ daharabhikkhuṃ purimanayeneva byaggho gaṇhi. So ‘‘byaggho bhante’’ti āha. Bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍe ca ukkāyo ca gahetvā mocessāmāti anubandhiṃsu. Byaggho bhikkhūnaṃ agatiṃ chinnataṭaṭṭhānamāruyha taṃ bhikkhuṃ pādaṅguṭṭhakato paṭṭhāya khādituṃ ārabhi. Itarepi ‘‘idāni sappurisa, amhehi kattabbaṃ natthi, bhikkhūnaṃ viseso nāma evarūpe ṭhāne paññāyatī’’ti āhaṃsu. So byagghamukhe nipannova taṃ vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento yāva gopphakā khāditasamaye sotāpanno hutvā, yāva jaṇṇukā khāditasamaye sakadāgāmī, yāva nābhiyā khāditasamaye anāgāmī hutvā, hadayarūpe akhāditeyeva saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
“具足戒行,具足禁戒与誓愿,有智慧,而且心善安定;
只因片刻的放逸,心就被老虎缠住了。
被抓住后,在笼中,被放置于岩石之上。
就算老虎吃了我,连骨头带筋一起吞下去;
我要灭尽诸烦恼,我要证得解脱。”
‘‘Sīlavā vatasampanno, paññavā susamāhito; Muhuttaṃ pamādamanvāya, byagghenoruddhamānaso. Pañjarasmiṃ gahetvāna, silāya uparī kato; Kāmaṃ khādatu maṃ byaggho, aṭṭhiyā ca nhārussa ca; Kilese khepayissāmi, phusissāmi vimuttiya’’nti.
还有一位名叫毕达末罗的长老,在俗家时曾在三个王国里执持王旗,后来来到铜掌岛,拜见国王,得到国王的护持。有一天,他经过一处草席商棚的门口,听到“诸比丘,色不属于你们,应当舍弃它;舍弃之后,它将在长夜里为你们带来利益和安乐”这“不属于你们”的法语,便想:“看来色确实不是自己的,受也不是。”他以此作为鞭策,离开俗家,前往大寺请求出家。出家并受具足戒后,他把二部戒本背得纯熟,带着三十位比丘前往嘎巴拉瓦利广场修习沙门法。当双脚无法支撑时,他就用膝盖经行。那天夜里,一个猎鹿人误以为他是鹿,用矛刺了他。矛穿透身体飞了出去,他让人拔出那支矛,用草叶填满伤口,在石板上坐下来,作意修观,增长毗婆舍那,最终与无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。闻声而来的比丘们到来后,他向他们说明了自己的证悟,并诵出这首优陀那:
Aparopi pītamallatthero nāma gihikāle tīsu rajjesu paṭākaṃ gahetvā tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ āgamma rājānaṃ passitvā raññā katānuggaho ekadivasaṃ kilañjakāpaṇasāladvārena gacchanto ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṃ, taṃ pajahatha, taṃ vo pahīnaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissatī’’ti na tumhākavākyaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘neva kira rūpaṃ attano, na vedanā’’ti. So taṃyeva aṅkusaṃ katvā nikkhamitvā mahāvihāraṃ gantvā pabbajjaṃ yācitvā pabbajito upasampanno dvemātikā paguṇā katvā tiṃsa bhikkhū gahetvā gabalavāliyaaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ akāsi. Pādesu avahantesu jaṇṇukehi caṅkamati. Tamenaṃ rattiṃ eko migaluddako migoti maññamāno pahari. Satti vinivijjhitvā gatā, so taṃ sattiṃ harāpetvā paharaṇamukhāni tiṇavaṭṭiyā pūrāpetvā pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ attānaṃ nisīdāpetvā okāsaṃ kāretvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā ukkāsitasaddena āgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ byākaritvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
“这是最胜佛所说的话,他是一切世间最殊胜的言说者;
诸比丘,这色不是你们的,你们应当舍弃它。
诸行确实无常,具有生灭的本性。
生起之后又灭去,它们的寂止就是快乐。”
‘‘Bhāsitaṃ buddhaseṭṭhassa, sabbalokaggavādino; Na tumhākamidaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ jaheyyātha bhikkhavo. Aniccā vata saṅkhārā, uppādavayadhammino; Uppajjitvā nirujjhanti, tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’ti.
就这样,这条道路像底沙长老等人那样,导向苦的灭尽。
Evaṃ tāva ayaṃ maggo tissattherādīnaṃ viya dukkhassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattati.
帝释天神——诸天神的统领——看到自己身上出现的五种预兆后,被死亡的恐惧所惊吓,生起了忧恼,便来到世尊面前提问。世尊解答了关于舍的问题之后,他与八万位天神一起证入了入流果。而他的再生也恢复了正常。
Sakko pana devānamindo attano pañcavidhapubbanimittaṃ disvā maraṇabhayasantajjito domanassajāto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchi. So upekkhāpañhavissajjanāvasāne asītisahassāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Sā cassa upapatti puna pākatikāva ahosi.
苏梵天子也在一千名天女的围绕下,享受着天界的福报。那时,有五百名天女正在树上采花,死后投生到了地狱。他心想:“她们怎么去了这么久还不回来?”观察之后,得知她们已经投生到地狱。于是他又审察:“我的寿命还剩多少?”结果发现自己的寿命也快到头了,死后同样会投生到那个地狱。他看到这一幕,心中恐惧,生起了极大的忧苦,想道:“我这份忧苦,只有导师能帮我消除,没有别人。”于是他带着剩下的五百名天女,来到世尊面前,提出了问题:
Subrahmāpi devaputto accharāsahassaparivuto saggasampattiṃ anubhoti. Tattha pañcasatā accharāyo rukkhato pupphāni ocinantiyo cavitvā niraye uppannā. So ‘‘kiṃ imā cirāyantī’’ti upadhārento tāsaṃ niraye nibbattanabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘kittakaṃ nu kho mama āyū’’ti upaparikkhanto attano āyuparikkhayaṃ viditvā cavitvā tattheva niraye nibbattanabhāvaṃ disvā bhīto ativiya domanassajāto hutvā ‘‘imaṃ me domanassaṃ satthā vinayissati, na añño’’ti avasesā pañcasatā accharāyo gahetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchi –
这颗心始终充满恐惧,这个意始终惶恐不安;
对于还没生起的困境,以及已经冒出来的困境,
如果有什么不害怕的境界,请告诉我,我这样问你。
‘‘Niccaṃ utrastamidaṃ cittaṃ, niccaṃ ubbiggidaṃ mano; Anuppannesu kicchesu, atho uppatitesu ca; Sace atthi anutrastaṃ, taṃ me akkhāhi pucchitoti. (saṃ. ni. 1.98);
于是世尊对他说:
Tato naṃ bhagavā āha –
“不靠觉悟的支分,不靠苦行,不靠收摄诸根,
不放下一切,我就看不到众生的安稳。”
‘‘Nāññatra bojjhā tapasā, nāññatrindriyasaṃvarā; Nāññatra sabbanissaggā, sotthiṃ passāmi pāṇina’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.98);
说法结束时,他和五百天女一起证得入流果,并使那成就变得稳固,然后就返回天界了。应当知道:这样修习此道,就像帝释天神等人那样,能导向忧愁的止息。
So desanāpariyosāne pañcahi accharāsatehi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya taṃ sampattiṃ thāvaraṃ katvā devalokameva agamāsīti. Evaṃ ayaṃ maggo bhāvito sakkādīnaṃ viya domanassassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattatīti veditabbo.
为了证得正道这句话中,所谓正道,指的就是圣八支道;为了证得它,意思就是为了达到它。因为在前一阶段修习了属于世间的念处之道,它就能导向出世间之道的证得,所以说为了证得正道。为了作证涅槃这句话中,由于远离了渴爱之林,所以得到了涅槃这个名字,也就是不死;为了亲自作证那个不死,也就是自己现前亲证,所以这样说。因为这条道修习之后,能一步步成就涅槃的作证,所以说为了作证涅槃。
Ñāyassa adhigamāyāti ñāyo vuccati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, tassa adhigamāya, pattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi pubbabhāge lokiyo satipaṭṭhānamaggo bhāvito lokuttaramaggassa adhigamāya saṃvattati. Tenāha ‘‘ñāyassa adhigamāyā’’ti. Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti taṇhāvānavirahitattā nibbānanti laddhanāmassa amatassa sacchikiriyāya, attapaccakkhatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito anupubbena nibbānasacchikiriyaṃ sādheti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti.
在这里,虽然一说到“为了众生的清净”,超越愁叹等在道理上就已经成立,但除了精通教法的人以外,其他人并不明白。而且世尊并不是先让人精通教法,然后再说法,而是通过相应的经文让人了解各个含义。因此,这里为了把一乘道所成就的每一种意义都清楚地展示出来,才说了“为了超越愁叹”等话。或者说,一乘道所成就的众生清净,是通过超越愁叹来实现的;超越愁叹,是通过苦和忧的止息来实现的;苦和忧的止息,是通过证得正道来实现的;证得正道,是为了作证涅槃。所以,为了显示这个次第,先说了“为了众生的清净”,然后再说“为了超越愁叹”等话。
Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti vutte sokasamatikkamādīni atthato siddhāneva honti, ṭhapetvā pana sāsanayuttikovide aññesaṃ na pākaṭāni, na ca bhagavā paṭhamaṃ sāsanayuttikovidaṃ janaṃ katvā pacchā dhammaṃ deseti. Tena teneva pana suttena taṃ taṃ atthaṃ ñāpeti. Tasmā idha yaṃ yaṃ atthaṃ ekāyanamaggo sādheti, taṃ taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādimāha. Yasmā vā yā sattānaṃ visuddhi ekāyanamaggena saṃvattati, sā sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamena hoti. Sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamo dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamena, dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamo ñāyassādhigamena, ñāyassādhigamo nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya. Tasmā imampi kamaṃ dassento ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādimāha.
另外,这是对一乘道的赞叹。正如世尊在讲六六法时,用八句话来赞叹:比丘们,我要为你们说法,开示这开头好、中间好、结尾也好,有意义、有文采,完全圆满清净的梵行,也就是六六法。又如在讲圣种时,用九句话来赞叹:比丘们,有四种圣种,被认为是最初的、久远的、传统的、古老的,不曾混杂,过去不曾混杂,现在不被混杂,未来也不会被混杂,不被沙门、婆罗门、智者所指责。同样地,对这条一乘道,也用“为了众生的清净”等七句话来赞叹。为什么要这样呢?是为了激发那些比丘的精进。因为听到赞叹之后,那些比丘会想:听说这条道能灭除四种灾祸,也就是内心灼热所产生的愁、言语散乱所产生的悲、身体不适所产生的苦、内心不适所产生的忧,还能带来三种殊胜,也就是清净、正智、涅槃。于是他们生起精进,认为这个法教应当学习、应当掌握、应当受持、应当读诵,这条道应当修习。就这样,为了激发那些比丘的精进,他作了赞叹。就像毛毯商人等人赞叹毛毯等东西一样。
Apica vaṇṇabhaṇanametaṃ ekāyanamaggassa. Yatheva hi bhagavā – ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsessāmi yadidaṃ chachakkānī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.420) chachakkadesanāya aṭṭhahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi. Yathā ca ariyavaṃsadesanāya ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, ariyavaṃsā aggaññā rattaññā vaṃsaññā porāṇā asaṃkiṇṇā asaṃkiṇṇapubbā na saṅkīyanti na saṅkīyissanti, appaṭikuṭṭhā samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī’’ti (a. ni. 4.28) navahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi; evaṃ imassāpi ekāyanamaggassa sattānaṃ visuddhiyātiādīhi sattahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi. Kasmāti ce, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ. Vaṇṇabhāsanañhi sutvā te bhikkhū ‘‘ayaṃ kira maggo hadayasantāpabhūtaṃ sokaṃ, vācāvippalāpabhūtaṃ paridevaṃ, kāyikaasātabhūtaṃ dukkhaṃ, cetasikaasātabhūtaṃ domanassanti cattāro upaddave hanati, visuddhiṃ ñāyaṃ nibbānanti tayo visese āvahatī’’ti ussāhajātā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ dhāretabbaṃ, vācetabbaṃ, imañca maggaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ maññissanti. Iti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi. Kambalavāṇijādayo kambalādīnaṃ vaṇṇaṃ viya.
就像一位贩卖价值十万的淡黄色毛毯的商人吆喝“来买毛毯”时,人们还搞不清到底是什么样的毛毯。因为人发毯、兽毛毯之类的,虽然又臭又扎人,也都叫毛毯。可是当他吆喝说“这是健陀罗产的红色毛毯,柔软、鲜亮、摸起来舒服”时,买得起的人就买了,买不起的人也想来看一看。同样,虽然说了“比丘们,这是一条唯一的道路”,但还搞不清是什么道路,因为各种各样不能导向解脱的路也被叫作路。然而,当说出“为了让众生清净”等话时,他们会想:“听说这条路能消灭四种灾祸,带来三种殊胜。”于是生起干劲,认为:“这个法教应当学习、应当掌握、应当受持、应当诵读,这条路应当修习。”为了赞叹,就说了“为了让众生清净”等话。就像那位贩卖价值十万的淡黄色毛毯的商人的比喻一样,这里也应当引用阎浮河赤金、清水摩尼宝、极净珍珠宝、珊瑚等商人的比喻。
Yathā hi satasahassagghanikapaṇḍukambalavāṇijena ‘kambalaṃ gaṇhathā’ti ugghositepi asukakambaloti na tāva manussā jānanti. Kesakambalavāḷakambalādayopi hi duggandhā kharasamphassā kambalātveva vuccanti. Yadā pana tena gandhārako rattakambalo sukhumo ujjalo sukhasamphassoti ugghositaṃ hoti, tadā ye pahonti, te gaṇhanti. Ye nappahonti, tepi dassanakāmā honti; evameva ‘ekāyano, bhikkhave, ayaṃ maggo’ti vuttepi asukamaggoti na tāva pākaṭo hoti. Nānappakārakā hi aniyyānikamaggāpi maggātveva vuccanti. ‘‘Sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādimhi pana vutte ‘‘ayaṃ kira maggo cattāro upaddave hanati, tayo visese āvahatī’’ti ussāhajātā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ dhāretabbaṃ vācetabbaṃ, imañca maggaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ maññissantīti vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanto ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādimāha. Yathā ca satasahassagghanikapaṇḍukambalavāṇijūpamā; evaṃ rattajambunadasuvaṇṇaudakappasādakamaṇiratanasuvisuddhamuttaratanapavāḷādivāṇijūpamādayopettha āharitabbā.
“即”是虚词,它的意思是“这些就是这些”。“四”是数量上的限定。通过这个限定,说明念处的范围:既不能比这个少,也不能比这个多。说到“念处”:有三种念处——念的所缘境;在三种修行方式的弟子当中,导师已经超越了反感与随顺;还有念本身。因为在“比丘们,我要宣说四念处的集起与灭去,你们听……比丘们,什么是身的集起?由食的集起而有身的集起”等经文中,念的所缘境被称为念处。同样,在“身是安立处,不是念;而念既是安立处,也是念”等文中也是如此。它的意思是:在这里安立,所以叫“安立处”。什么在这里安立?念。念的安立处就是念处。或者说,以主要之处为安立处,念的安立处就是念处,就像象厩、马厩等说法一样。
Yadidanti nipāto, ye imeti ayamassa attho. Cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo. Tena na tato heṭṭhā, na uddhanti satipaṭṭhānaparicchedaṃ dīpeti. Satipaṭṭhānāti tayo satipaṭṭhānā satigocaropi tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatāpi, satipi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca desessāmi, taṃ suṇātha…pe… ko ca, bhikkhave, kāyassa samudayo. Āhārasamudayā kāyassa samudayo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.408) hi satigocaro satipaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tathā ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ no sati, sati pana upaṭṭhānañceva sati cā’’tiādīsupi (paṭi. ma. 3.35). Tassattho – patiṭṭhāti asminti paṭṭhānaṃ. Kā patiṭṭhāti? Sati. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, padhānaṃ ṭhānanti vā paṭṭhānaṃ. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ hatthiṭṭhānaassaṭṭhānādīni viya.
有三类念处,是圣者所依止的;圣者依止而修习时,导师才有资格教导大众。(中部3.311)在这里,对于以三种方式修行的弟子们来说,导师超越了反感与随顺,这种状态被称为“念处”。它的意思是:应当安立,所以叫安立处,也就是应当让它生起的意思。以何安立?以念。以念之安立即念处。不过,在“四念处已修习、已多修习,能圆满七觉支”(中部3.147)等经文里,念本身就被称为“念处”。它的意思是:安立,就是安立处;现前、跃入、趣入、展开、运行,就是安立的意思。念本身就是念处。或者也可以说:以忆念为念,以安立为安立处;这样一来,念就是那个,安立处也是那个,所以叫念处。这里要取的正是这个意思。
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsituṃ arahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.311) ettha tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Tassattho – paṭṭhapetabbato paṭṭhānaṃ, pavattayitabbatoti attho. Kena paṭṭhapetabbatoti? Satiyā. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta sambojjhaṅge paripūrentī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.147) pana satiyeva ‘‘satipaṭṭhānaṃ’’ti vuccati. Tassattho – paṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkanditvā pakkhanditvā pattharitvā pavattatīti attho. Satiyeva satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ. Iti sati ca sā paṭṭhānaṃ cātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Idamidhādhippetaṃ.
如果是这样,为什么“念处”要用复数?因为念有多种。由于所缘的不同,这些念确实有很多种。那么,“道”为什么用单数?因为在道的意义上它是单一的。这四种念在道的意义上都归于单一。正如这样说:“道以什么意义称为道?以走向涅槃的意义,以被求涅槃者所寻求的意义。”这四种念在后来的阶段,对身体等所缘完成各自的作用时,都走向涅槃,而且从一开始就被求涅槃者所寻求,所以这四种也被称为“一道”。这样一来,随着文句的衔接,这个教导就是前后连贯的,就像在“比丘们,我要为你们讲说摧毁魔军之道,你们听好……比丘们,什么是摧毁魔军之道?就是七觉支”等经文里那样。就像“摧毁魔军”和“七觉支”在意义上是一回事,只是表达上有所不同;同样,“一乘道”和“四念处”在意义上也是一回事,只是表达上有所不同。因此,因为在道的意义上是一体的,所以用单数;因为所缘的不同使念有多种,所以应当知道用复数。
Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti bahuvacanaṃ? Satibahuttā. Ārammaṇabhedena hi bahukā etā satiyo. Atha maggoti kasmā ekavacanaṃ? Maggaṭṭhena ekattā. Catassopi hi etā satiyo maggaṭṭhena ekattaṃ gacchanti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānagamanaṭṭhena. Nibbānatthikehi magganīyaṭṭhena cā’’ti. Catassopi cetā aparabhāge kāyādīsu ārammaṇesu kiccaṃ sādhayamānā nibbānaṃ gacchanti, ādito paṭṭhāya ca nibbānatthikehi maggiyanti, tasmā catassopi eko maggoti vuccanti. Evañca sati vacanānusandhinā sānusandhikāva desanā hoti, ‘‘mārasenappamaddanaṃ, vo bhikkhave, maggaṃ desessāmi, taṃ suṇātha…pe… katamo ca, bhikkhave, mārasenappamaddano maggo? Yadidaṃ satta bojjhaṅgā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.224) viya. Yathā mārasenappamaddanoti ca, satta bojjhaṅgāti ca atthato ekaṃ, byañjanamevettha nānaṃ . Evaṃ ‘‘ekāyanamaggo’’ti ca ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti ca atthato ekaṃ, byañjanamevettha nānaṃ, tasmā maggaṭṭhena ekattā ekavacanaṃ. Ārammaṇabhedena satibahuttā bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
那么,世尊为什么只说四念处,不多也不少呢?是为了利益应当受教化的众生。在贪行者、见行者、止行者、观行者这四类应受教化的众生中,每一类又按钝根和利根分成两种:对钝根的贪行者来说,粗显的身随观念处是他们的清净道;对利根的贪行者来说,微细的受随观念处是他们的清净道。对钝根的见行者来说,不太繁复的心随观念处是他们的清净道;对利根的见行者来说,极其繁复的法随观念处是他们的清净道。对钝根的止行者来说,因为所缘相容易证得,第一念处是他们的清净道;对利根的止行者来说,因为心在粗的所缘上无法安住,第二念处是他们的清净道。对钝根的观行者来说,所缘不太繁复的第三念处是他们的清净道;对利根的观行者来说,所缘极其繁复的第四念处是他们的清净道。因此,只说这四念处,不多也不少。
Kasmā pana bhagavatā cattārova satipaṭṭhānā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti? Veneyyahitattā. Taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritasamathayānikavipassanāyānikesu hi mandatikkhavasena dvedhā dvedhā pavattesu veneyyesu mandassa taṇhācaritassa oḷārikaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa sukhumaṃ vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Diṭṭhicaritassapi mandassa nātippabhedagataṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa atippabhedagataṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo. Samathayānikassa ca mandassa akicchena adhigantabbanimittaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato dutiyaṃ. Vipassanāyānikassapi mandassa nātippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ tatiyaṃ, tikkhassa atippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ catutthaṃ. Iti cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti.
或者,也可以说是为了断除净、乐、常、我四种颠倒。因为身体确实是不净的,而众生却在这上面生起“净”的颠倒,被颠倒所困。为了让他们通过看见这里的不净本质,来断除那种颠倒,所以先说第一个念处。同样,当人们在受等法上执取为乐、为常、为我时:受其实是苦,心其实是无常,诸法其实是无我,而众生却在这些法上被乐、常、我的颠倒所困。为了让他们通过看见这些法中的苦等本质,来断除那些颠倒,所以说了其余三个念处。因此应当知道,世尊正是为了断除净、乐、常、我四种颠倒,才说了这四念处,不多不少。而且不仅是为了断除颠倒,还应当知道,也是为了断除四种暴流、四种轭、四种漏、四种缚、四种取、四种非行,以及为了遍知四种食,世尊同样只说这四念处。以上就是本论的纲要。
Subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsappahānatthaṃ vā. Kāyo hi asubho, tattha ca subhavipallāsavipallatthā sattā. Tesaṃ tattha asubhabhāvadassanena tassa vipallāsassa pahānatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Sukhaṃ niccaṃ attāti gahitesupi ca vedanādīsu vedanā dukkhā, cittaṃ aniccaṃ, dhammā anattā, tesu ca sukhaniccaattavipallāsavipallatthā sattā. Tesaṃ tattha dukkhādibhāvadassanena tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ pahānatthaṃ sesāni tīṇi vuttānīti evaṃ subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsappahānatthaṃ vā cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti veditabbā. Na kevalañca vipallāsappahānatthameva, atha kho caturoghayogāsavaganthaupādānaagatipahānatthampi catubbidhāhārapariññatthañca cattārova vuttāti veditabbā. Ayaṃ tāva pakaraṇanayo.
不过在义注里,依归趣之理和同归一处之理,说念处其实只有一种,只是依所缘的差别才说为四种,这里说的正是这个意思。就像一座有四座城门的城市:从东方来的人,带着东方出产的货物,从东门进入城里;从南方来的人,带着南方出产的货物,从南门进入城里;从西方来的人,带着西方出产的货物,从西门进入城里;从北方来的人,带着北方出产的货物,从北门进入城里。这个譬喻应当这样理解:城市好比涅槃大城,城门好比八支圣出世间道,东方等方位就好比身等念处。
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattāroti etadeva vuttaṃ. Yathā hi catudvāre nagare pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, dakkhiṇato. Pacchimato. Uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti; evaṃ – sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nagaraṃ viya hi nibbānamahānagaraṃ, dvāraṃ viya aṭṭhaṅgiko lokuttaramaggo, pācīnadisādayo viya kāyādayo.
就像从东方来的人,带着东方出产的货物,从东门进入城里一样;同样,从身随观这个门进来的人,以十四种方式修习身随观之后,通过由身随观修习之力所产生的圣道,都只归入同一个涅槃。就像从南方来的人,带着南方出产的货物,从南门进入城里一样;同样,从受随观这个门进来的人,以九种方式修习受随观之后,通过由受随观修习之力所产生的圣道,都只归入同一个涅槃。就像从西方来的人,带着西方出产的货物,从西门进入城里一样;同样,从心随观这个门进来的人,以十六种方式修习心随观之后,通过由心随观修习之力所产生的圣道,都只归入同一个涅槃。就像从北方来的人,带着北方出产的货物,从北门进入城里一样;同样,从法随观这个门进来的人,以五种方式修习法随观之后,通过由法随观修习之力所产生的圣道,都只归入同一个涅槃。应当知道,从归入之处来说,以及从同归一处来说,念处其实只有一种,只是从所缘的角度才说为四种。
Yathā pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ kāyānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā kāyānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā dakkhiṇato āgacchantā dakkhiṇāya disāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ vedanānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā vedanānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā pacchimato āgacchantā pacchimadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pacchimadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ cittānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā cittānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ dhammānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā dhammānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Evaṃ saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattārova vuttāti veditabbā.
“是哪四种呢?”这是带着想要宣说的意图而提出的问题。“在此”:是指在这个教法之中。“诸比丘”:这是对领受法义之人的称呼。“比丘”:这是对修行实践成就者的举例说明。虽然其他天与人也在修行实践,但因为比丘最为殊胜,而且为了显示通过修行实践而成就比丘身份,所以世尊说“诸比丘”。在领受世尊教导的人当中,比丘最为殊胜,因为比丘能成为一切种类教导的容器。因此,由于最为殊胜,世尊说“诸比丘”。而一旦提到比丘,其余的人也就随之被包含在内了,就像在说到国王出行等场合时,单说“国王”就涵盖了其余的随从一样。再者,凡是修行这种实践的人,就叫做比丘——这也是为了显示通过修行实践而成就比丘身份,所以说“诸比丘”。因为正在修行实践的人,不管是天还是人,都归入“比丘”这个称呼之中,正如经文所说:
Katamecattāroti kathetukamyatā pucchā. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Bhikkhaveti dhammapaṭiggāhakapuggalālapanametaṃ. Bhikkhūti paṭipattisampādakapuggalanidassanametaṃ. Aññepi ca devamanussā paṭipattiṃ sampādentiyeva, seṭṭhattā pana paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanato ca ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha. Bhagavato hi anusāsaniṃ sampaṭicchantesu bhikkhu seṭṭho, sabbappakārāya anusāsaniyā bhājanabhāvato. Tasmā seṭṭhattā ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha. Tasmiṃ gahite pana sesā gahitāva honti, rājagamanādīsu rājaggahaṇena sesaparisā viya. Yo ca imaṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjati, so bhikkhu nāma hotīti paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanatopi ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha. Paṭipannako hi devo vā hotu manusso vā, bhikkhūti saṅkhyaṃ gacchatiyeva yathāha –
“纵使严饰盛装身,若能行持于正法;
寂静调御心坚定,如是勤修梵行者。
对一切众生都放下棍棒武器,
他就是婆罗门,他就是沙门,他就是比丘。”
‘‘Alaṅkato cepi samaṃ careyya, Santo danto niyato brahmacārī; Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, So brāhmaṇo so samaṇo sa bhikkhū’’ti. (dha. pa. 142);
这里说的“身”,是指色身。色身在这里被理解为各种大小肢体以及头发等法的集合,就像“象身”“车身”那样,所以叫“身”。它既是从集合的意义上叫“身”,也是从可厌之物的出生处的意义上叫“身”。因为它是那些极其可厌、最令人厌恶之物的出生处。“出生处”就是生起的地方。这里的词义是这样解释的:那些东西来到这里,所以叫“来处”。什么东西来呢?就是头发等可厌之物。因此,可厌之物的来处就是“身”。
Kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena hatthikāyarathakāyādayo viya kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatthāyaṃ vacanattho. Āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo.
“随观身”是指习惯于随观身,或者正在随观身。说了“身”之后,又再一次说“随观身”,这第二个“身”应当理解为:为了显示不混杂的界定,以及显示破除坚实想等。因此,并不是在身中随观受,也不是随观心或随观法,而恰恰只是随观身——这样,通过显示在名为“身”的事物上纯粹是随观身这个行相,就表明了不混杂的界定。同样地,不是观察脱离身体各部分而单独存在的某一事物,也不是观察脱离头发、体毛等而存在的男人或女人;在这里,即使是由头发、体毛等四大种及所造色聚合而成的所谓“身”,其中也不是观察脱离四大种与所造色的某一事物,而是像观察车的各个零件一样观察身体各部分肢节的集合,像观察城市的各个区域一样观察头发、体毛等的集合,像层层剥开芭蕉树干的人、像拆解空拳缠绕的人一样,纯粹观察四大种与所造色的集合——如此,通过种种方式,纯粹从集合的角度来显示名为“身”的事物,就表明了破除坚实想。因为在这里,看不到超出上述集合之外的所谓“身”,也看不到女人、男人或其他任何法;众生只是对上述这些法的集合,以各种方式产生错误的执著。因此古人说——
Kāyānupassīti kāye anupassanasīlo kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno. Kāyeti ca vatvāpi puna kāyānupassīti dutiyakāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī vā, cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassīyevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī, yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthapi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibbhujako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti nānappakārato samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“他看见的,并不是被见到的;而被见到的,他却看不见。
愚痴的人看不见真相,所以被绑住;一旦被绑住,就解脱不了。”
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti.
“为了显示破除坚实想等”这句话已经说了,这里通过“等”这个字,还应当了解这样一层意思:也就是说,在这具身体上,只是身随观,而不是其他法的随观。就像在没有水的阳焰上,也会有人把它随观为水;但这里不是这样。在这具本质上无常、苦、无我、不净的身体上,不是去随观常、乐、我、净,而是身随观,也就是随观无常、苦、无我、不净这些相的总合——这就是这句话所要表达的意思。或者说,下文按照“比丘们,在这里,比丘前往林野……他具念而入息”这样的方式,从入出息开始,直到身体最终变成粉末状的骨头为止,所说的这个身体;以及《无碍解》中所说的身体:“这里,有一类人随观地身是无常的,随观水身、火身、风身、发身、毛身、皮肤身、肉身、血身、筋身、骨身、骨髓身是无常的”——对于这一切,因为都是在这同一具身体上作随观,所以“于身,是身随观者”这个意思也应当这样了解。
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ, ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo. Ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na añña dhammānupassīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattaasubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhaattasubhabhāvānupassī, atha kho kāyānupassī aniccadukkhānattaasubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ parato ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā nayena assāsapassāsādicuṇṇikajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, āpokāyaṃ tejokāyaṃ vāyokāyaṃ kesakāyaṃ lomakāyaṃ chavikāyaṃ cammakāyaṃ maṃsakāyaṃ rudhirakāyaṃ nhārukāyaṃ aṭṭhikāyaṃ aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) paṭisambhidāyaṃ kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiññeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho veditabbo.
或者也可以这样理解:不去随观身体中任何可以被执为“我”或“我所”的东西,而只是随观头发、体毛等种种法的集合。因此,所谓“于身随观身”,就是指随观被称为身体的那些头发等法的集合——应当这样理解它的含义。
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa yassa kassaci ananupassanato, tassa tasseva pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhātakāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
另外,也可以这样理解“于身随观身”这句话:按照“他在这具身体上随观无常,而不是随观常”等等说法,依照《无碍解道》中依次出现的方式,对一切以无常等行相组成的、被称为“身”的整体进行随观。也就是说,这位修习身随观法门的比丘,依靠无常随观等七种随观来观察这具身体:随观无常,不随观常;随观苦,不随观乐;随观无我,不随观我;厌离,不欢喜;离贪,不染着;令灭,不令生起;舍遣,不执取。应当知道:他随观无常时,就舍断常想;随观苦时,就舍断乐想;随观无我时,就舍断我想;厌离时,就舍断欢喜;离贪时,就舍断贪;令灭时,就舍断集;舍遣时,就舍断执取。
Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā anukkamena paṭisambhidāyaṃ āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanatopi kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi ayaṃ kāye kāyānupassanāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno bhikkhu imaṃ kāyaṃ aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena aniccato anupassati, no niccato. Dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato. Anattato anupassati, no attato. Nibbindati, no nandati, virajjati, no rajjati, nirodheti. No samudeti, paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. So taṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati , dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati, nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati , virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati, nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti veditabbo.
住就是活动、行动。所谓热诚,是指在欲界、色界、无色界这三界中烧尽烦恼,所以叫热诚,这是精进的名称;具有这种热诚,就叫热诚者。所谓正知,就是具备被称为正知的智慧。所谓具念,就是具备能把握身体的念。不过,因为他是先用念把握所缘,再用智慧随观,而离开了念就不可能有什么随观,所以世尊说:“诸比丘,我说念在一切处都有用。”因此,这里说到“于身随观身而住”,就已经说明了身随观念处。或者也可以说:没有热诚的人,内心退缩,会成为障碍;没有正知的人,在把握适当方法和避开不适当方法时会迷惑;失念的人,对于不舍弃适当方法和不执取不适当方法无能为力,他的业处就无法成就。因此,为了显示那些能让他成就业处的法,才说“热诚、正知、具念”,应当这样理解。
Viharatīti iriyati. Ātāpīti tīsu bhavesu kilese ātāpetīti ātāpo, vīriyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ātāpo assa atthīti ātāpī. Sampajānoti sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi, tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassati upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamattho hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati. Tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这段是义注在解释“调伏世间中的贪忧”这句话。它先说明:前面已经展示了身随观念处的相应支,现在为了展示断除支,才说“调伏世间中的贪忧”。这里的“调伏”,是指通过彼分断或镇伏断来调伏。“世间”指的就是这个身体本身,因为身体在这里是依“坏灭、崩坏”的意思而被称为世间。不过,贪忧并不是只在身体上才被断除,在受等其他方面也同样被断除。所以《分别论》中说:“五取蕴就是世间。”或者说,那些法被称为世间,是依义理归纳而说的。至于“于此,什么是世间?这个身体本身就是世间”这句话,才是这里真正的意思。应当这样理解它们的关联:在那个世间中调伏贪忧。再者,这里用“贪”来统摄爱欲,用“忧”来统摄嗔恚,因此这是通过显示两种属于盖的强有力法,来说明诸盖的断除。
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañcassa dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi tasmiññeva kāye. Kāyo hi idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti adhippeto. Yasmā panassa na kāyamatteyeva abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīyati, vedanādīsupi pahīyatiyeva. Tasmā pañcapi upādānakkhandhā lokoti vibhaṅge vuttaṃ. Lokasaṅkhātattā vā tesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthuddhāranayenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panāha – ‘‘tattha katamo loko? Sveva kāyo loko’’ti, ayamevettha attho. Tasmiṃ loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ vineyyāti evaṃ sambandho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāggahaṇena kāmacchando, domanassaggahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
这里特别要说明:调伏贪欲,便断除了以身体健全为根源的随顺贪著;调伏忧恼,便断除了以身体衰败为根源的抗拒违逆。调伏贪欲,便断除了对身体的喜乐贪恋;调伏忧恼,便断除了对身体修习的不喜。调伏贪欲,便断除了在身体上附加那些本来不存在的净想、乐想等;调伏忧恼,便断除了在身体上否定那些真实存在的不净、苦等。由此,显示了瑜伽行者的瑜伽力量与瑜伽能力。这确实就是瑜伽力量:即远离随顺与违逆,能承受不喜与喜乐,不附加不真实的东西,也不否定真实存在的东西。而这个人远离随顺与违逆,能承受不喜与喜乐,不附加不真实的东西,也不否定真实存在的东西,便具有瑜伽能力。
Visesena cettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa ca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa, yadidaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto aratiratisaho abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanayanto yogasamattho hotīti.
还有一种理解方式:在“于身随观身”这句话里,说的是以随观作为业处。“安住”这句话里,说的是按照所说的安住方式,业处行者对身体的维护。而在“热诚”等词中,热诚说的是正精进,念和正知说的是一切处业处,或者说是维护业处的方法。或者也可以这样理解:由念说明通过身随观而获得的止,由正知说明观,由调伏贪忧说明修习的力量。
Aparo nayo ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ, ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādīsu pana ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā. Satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanābalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
不过在《分别论》里,对“随观者”是这样解释的:其中,什么是随观?就是慧、了知、简择、考察、法简择、总相察知、别相察知、审细察知、聪敏、善巧、精练、分析、思考、审度、地慧、心向导慧、观、正知、策励者、慧、慧根、慧力、慧剑、慧殿、慧光、慧照明、慧灯、慧宝、不痴、法简择、正见——这称为随观。他具备、具足、已抵达、已达到、已生起、拥有这种随观,因此称为“随观者”。“安住”:就是行走、转起、保护、运作、使运作、行动、居住,因此称为“安住”。“精勤者”:其中,什么是精勤?就是心的精进、策励、勇猛、努力、奋勉、发奋、坚强、坚毅、不松懈精勤性、不舍轭性、不弃担者、持轭胜、精进、精进根、精进力、正精进——这称为精勤。他具备……中略……拥有这种精勤,因此称为“精勤者”。“正知者”:其中,什么是正知?就是慧、了知……中略……不痴、法简择、正见(与“随观”的解释相同)——这称为正知。他具备……中略……拥有这种正知,因此称为“正知者”。“具念者”:其中,什么是念?就是念、随念、忆念、记忆性、持守性、不漂浮性、不忘失性、念、念根、念力、正念——这称为念。他具备……中略……拥有这种念,因此称为“具念者”。
Vibhaṅge pana anupassīti tattha ‘‘katamā anupassanā? Yā paññā pajānanā vicayo pavicayo dhammavicayo sallakkhaṇā upalakkhaṇā paccupalakkhaṇā paṇḍiccaṃ kosallaṃ nepuññaṃ vebhabyā cintā upaparikkhā bhūrīmedhā pariṇāyikā vipassanā sampajaññaṃ patodo paññā paññindriyaṃ paññābalaṃ paññāsatthaṃ paññāpāsādo paññāāloko paññāobhāso paññāpajjoto paññāratanaṃ amoho dhammavicayo sammādiṭṭhi, ayaṃ vuccati anupassanā. Imāya anupassanāya upeto hoti samupeto upagato samupagato upapanno samannāgato, tena vuccati anupassīti. Viharatīti iriyati pavattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti carati viharati, tena vuccati viharatīti. Ātāpīti tattha katamaṃ ātāpaṃ? Yo cetasiko vīriyārambho nikammo parakkamo uyyāmo vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī thāmo dhiti asithilaparakkamatā anikkhittaddandatā anikkhittadhuratā dhurasampaggāhī vīriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ vīriyabalaṃ sammāvāyāmo, idaṃ vuccati ātāpaṃ. Iminā ātāpena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato , tena vuccati ātāpīti. Sampajānoti tattha katamaṃ sampajaññaṃ? Yā paññā pajānanā vicayo pavicayo dhammavicayo sallakkhaṇā upalakkhaṇā paccupalakkhaṇā paṇḍiccaṃ kosallaṃ nepuññaṃ vebhabyā cintā upaparikkhā bhūrīmedhā pariṇāyikā vipassanā sampajaññaṃ patodo paññā paññindriyaṃ paññābalaṃ paññāsatthaṃ paññāpāsādo paññāāloko paññāobhāso paññāpajjoto paññāratanaṃ amoho dhammavicayo sammādiṭṭhi, idaṃ vuccati sampajaññaṃ. Iminā sampajaññena upeto hoti …pe… samannāgato, tena vuccati sampajānoti. Satimāti tattha katamā sati? Yā sati anussati paṭissati sati saraṇatā dhāraṇatā apilāpanatā asammusanatā sati satindriyaṃ satibalaṃ sammāsati , ayaṃ vuccati sati. Imāya satiyā upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato, tena vuccati satimāti.
“调伏世间的贪忧”:这里,什么是“世间”?这个身体就是世间,五取蕴也是世间,这称为世间。这里,什么是“贪”?凡是贪、深贪、随顺、随悦、喜、喜贪、心的深贪,这称为贪。这里,什么是“忧”?凡是心所的不乐、心所的苦、由心触所生的不乐与苦受,这称为忧。这样,这贪和这忧在这个世间已被调伏、彻底调伏、寂止、平息、止息、消失、灭没、排除、遣除、干涸、完全干涸、断尽无余,因此说“调伏世间的贪忧”。
Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti tattha katamo loko? Sveva kāyo loko. Pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko, ayaṃ vuccati loko. Tattha katamā abhijjhā? Yo rāgo sārāgo anunayo anurodho nandī nandirāgo cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati abhijjhā. Tattha katamaṃ domanassaṃ? Yaṃ cetasikaṃ asātaṃ cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ cetosamphassajā asātā dukkhā vedanā, idaṃ vuccati domanassaṃ. Iti ayañca abhijjhā, idañca domanassaṃ imamhi loke vinītā honti paṭivinītā santā samitā vūpasamitā atthaṅgatā abbhatthaṅgatā appitā byappitā sositā visositā byantīkatā, tena vuccati vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti (vibha. 357-362).
这些词句的含义已经讲完了。应当这样理解:这部注疏的讲法与此处的内容是相合的。以上便是对“身随观念处”这一总标的义释。
Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho vutto. Tena saha ayaṃ aṭṭhakathānayo yathā saṃsandati, evaṃ veditabbo. Ayaṃ tāva kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānuddesassa atthavaṇṇanā.
现在讲受、心、法这几部分。“于受随观受而住……乃至……调伏世间的贪忧”,在这里,对于“于受随观受”等说法中为什么再次提到受等,应当依照身随观中已说过的道理来理解。“于受随观受,于心随观心,于法随观法”这里,“受”指三种受,而且只是世间的受;心也是世间心,法同样如此。它们的详细区分在广说部分会变得清楚。不过这里只需知道:他按照受应当被随观的方式去随观,所以称为“于受随观受”。这个道理对心和法也一样。那么,受应当怎样随观呢?乐受应观为苦,苦受应观为箭,不苦不乐受应观为无常。正如所说:
Idāni vedanāsu. Citte. Dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati…pe… vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti ettha vedanāsu vedanānupassīti evamādīsu vedanādīnaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī. Citte cittānupassī. Dhammesu dhammānupassīti ettha pana vedanāti tisso vedanā, tā ca lokiyā eva. Cittampi lokiyaṃ, tathā dhammā. Tesaṃ vibhāgo niddesavāre pākaṭo bhavissati. Kevalaṃ panidha yathā vedanā anupassitabbā, tathā tā anupassanto ‘‘vedanāsu vedanānupassī’’ti veditabbo. Esa nayo cittadhammesupi. Kathañca vedanā anupassitabbāti? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā sallato, adukkhamasukhā aniccato. Yathāha –
“他把乐看成苦,把苦看成箭;
他把那寂静的不苦不乐之受看作无常;
那位真正如实观见的比丘,将会以内心寂静的状态而行。”
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu, upasanto carissatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
这一切受都应该被观为“苦”。经中确实这样说:“凡是被感受的,我都说它是苦。”也应该从乐和苦的角度来随观。正如经中所说:“乐受在持续时是乐,在变坏时是苦。”这一切都应该详细展开。此外,也应该依照无常等七种随观来随观。其余的内容在广说分中自然会清楚。
Sabbā eva cetā ‘‘dukkhā’’tipi anupassitabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā. Yathāha ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Apica aniccādisattaanupassanāvasenapi anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ niddesavāreyeva pākaṭaṃ bhavissati.
在心法方面也一样:先说“心”,应当从所缘、增上、俱生、地、业、果报、作用等种种差别,以及无常等随观,还有广说分里讲到的有贪等分类来随观。至于“法”,则应当从自相与共相、空性之法、无常等七种随观,以及广说分里讲到的寂静等分类来随观。其余部分和前面说的一样。这里虽然可以说,对名为“身”的世间已经断除了贪忧的人,在受等处也同样已经断除了;但这是为了说明不同的人、以及在不同心刹那中修习念处的差别,所以处处都这样说。又或者说,因为在一处断除了,在其余各处也就断除了,因此应当知道,这样说也是为了显示那些地方同样有断除。
Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādianupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasarāgādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ. Dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatadhammassa aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasantādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādīsupi taṃ pahīnameva. Nānāpuggalavasena pana nānācittakkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti, tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi etaṃ vuttanti veditabbanti.
身随观的入出息部分注释
Kāyānupassanā ānāpānapabbavaṇṇanā
374374. 现在,就像一位灵巧的竹编工匠,想要制作粗席、细席、篮子、箩筐、盒子等器具,得到一根大竹子后,把它破成四份,然后取每一段竹子劈开,做成各种器具。同样,世尊为了让众生通过念处的教导获得种种殊胜的证悟,把同一个正念按所缘分为四类:“有四念处。哪四种?在此,诸比丘,比丘于身随观身而住……”如此分完之后,为了逐一详细解释各个念处,便以“诸比丘,如何……”这样的方式开始解说“身”的部分。
374. Idāni seyyathāpi nāma cheko vilīvakārako thūlakilañjasaṇhakilañjacaṅkoṭakapeḷāpuṭādīni upakaraṇāni kattukāmo ekaṃ mahāveṇuṃ labhitvā catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ veṇukhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā phāletvā taṃ taṃ upakaraṇaṃ kareyya, evameva bhagavā satipaṭṭhānadesanāya sattānaṃ anekappakāraṃ visesādhigamaṃ kattukāmo ekameva sammāsatiṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā nayena ārammaṇavasena catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā kāyaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave’’tiādinā nayena niddesavāraṃ vattumāraddho.
在这里,“如何”等语句,是为了想要详细解说而提出的问题。不过,这里的大意是:诸比丘,比丘以什么样的方式于身随观身而住呢?这个道理适用于所有提问的段落。这里说“诸比丘,比丘”,意思是:诸比丘,就是在这教法中的比丘。这里“在此”这个词,既点明这教法是能生起一切种类身随观的个人的所依止,也排除了其他教法中会有同样的情况。经中确实这样说:“诸比丘,只有在此处才有沙门……其他外道的言论都是空洞无实的,与沙门不同。”因此说“在这教法中的比丘”。
Tattha kathañcātiādi vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave, kena ca pakārena bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharatīti? Esa nayo sabbapucchāvāresu. Idha bhikkhave bhikkhūti bhikkhave imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhettha idhasaddo sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘idheva bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
或者前往森林,或者前往树下,或者前往空寂之处——这句话是在说明,他选择了适合修习念处的住处。因为这位比丘长久以来,心一直在色等所缘上四处散驰,不愿意进入业处的道路,就像套着顽劣牛的牛车,只会往歪路上跑。所以,就好比有个牧人,想调伏一头喝足了顽劣母牛奶水而长大的顽劣小牛,就把它从母牛身边带走,在一边地上埋下一根大柱子,用绳子把它拴在那里。那小牛东挣西扯,发现逃不掉,最后就会靠近那根柱子坐下或躺下。同样,这位比丘想调伏长久以来因品尝色等所缘之味而养成的顽劣之心,就要把心从色等所缘上移开,进入森林、树下或空寂之处,在那里用念的绳子把心拴在念处所缘的柱子上。这样,他的心虽然还会东挣西扯,却找不到过去习惯攀附的所缘,又挣不断念的绳子逃走,于是就通过近行定和安止定,靠近并安住在那个所缘上。因此古德说:
Araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vāti idamassa satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ kammaṭṭhānavīthiṃ otarituṃ na icchati, kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati. Tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya. Athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā, evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā rukkhamūlaṃ vā suññāgāraṃ vā pavisitvā tattha satipaṭṭhānārammaṇatthambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“就像有人在这里把一头已调教的小牛拴在柱子上;
应当这样把自己的心牢牢系在念的所缘上。”
‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti.
这样一来,他的坐卧处就适合修习了。因此说:这是说明他获得了适合修习念处的坐卧处。
Evamassetaṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idamassa satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
另外,由于这入出息念业处是身随观的顶点,是一切佛陀、独觉佛和声闻弟子证得殊胜成就、现法乐住的基础,如果不离开充满男女、象、马等嘈杂声音的村庄附近,就不容易修成,因为对禅那来说,声音好比是刺。但在没有村庄的森林里,修行者就容易掌握这个业处,修成入出息念的第四禅,再以那禅那作为基础,观照诸行,从而证得最高的果位——阿拉汉果。所以,世尊为了向他指出合适的住处,才说“前往森林……”等话。
Apica yasmā idaṃ kāyānupassanāya muddhabhūtaṃ sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ sampādetuṃ, saddakaṇḍakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ, tasmāssa anurūpasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā, ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
世尊就像一位相地师。相地师会先观察城址,仔细考察之后,才指点说:“在这里建城。”等城市顺利建成,他就从王族那里得到极大的恭敬。同样,世尊先观察适合修行者的住处,然后指点说:“应当在这里精勤修习业处。”之后,那位修行者在那里精勤修习业处,逐步证得阿拉汉果,于是那位修行者就得到极大的恭敬:“那位世尊确实是正自觉者!”
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā. So yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati, evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpasenāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjitabba’’nti upadisati, tato tattha kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjantena yoginā anukkamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati.
这位比丘则被称为“如豹者”。就像大豹王在森林里,靠着草丛、树林或山丛隐蔽起来,捕捉林水牛、牛耳鹿、野猪等野兽;同样,这位比丘在森林等处精勤修习业处,便依次证得四道和四圣果。因此古代的老师们说——
Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu dīpisadisoti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti, evameva ayaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena cattāro magge ceva cattāri ariyaphalāni ca gaṇhāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“就像名叫豹的野兽,先潜伏起来,再扑捉鹿等猎物;
这位佛子也同样,专心投入修行,具备观照的智慧;
进入森林之后,他就能取得最殊胜的果。”
‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige; Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako; Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti.
世尊为了说明那适合精进、敏捷修行的住处——阿兰若坐卧处,才说了“或进入阿兰若”等话。从这里往后,在这个出入息念品中应当说的内容,在《清净道论》里都已经说过了。“诸比丘,犹如一位善巧的旋工”等,这只是譬喻而已;“或于内身”等,也只是安止的简说;其中没有提到的部分,其余地方都已经讲过了。
Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha. Ito paraṃ imasmiṃ ānāpānapabbe yaṃ vattavbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho bhamakāro vāti idañhi upamāmattameva iti ajjhattaṃ vā kāyeti idaṃ appanāmattameva ca tattha anāgataṃ, sesaṃ āgatameva.
至于未来的部分,那里“dakkho”指善巧的人。“长拉”是指在制作大鼓、大瓮等大件时,把手脚伸展开来,长长地拉。“短拉”是指在制作牙签、针筒等小件时,慢慢地、短短地拉。同样地,这位比丘也随着入出息的长短——长入息时,他了知“我长入息”……乃至学习“我将出息”。当他这样修习时,以入出息的相为所缘,四种禅那生起;他出定之后,或者把握入出息,或者把握禅支。
Yaṃ pana anāgataṃ, tattha dakkhoti cheko. Dīghaṃ vā añchantoti mahantānaṃ bherīpokkharādīnaṃ likhanakāle hatthe ca pāde ca pasāretvā dīghaṃ kaḍḍhanto. Rassaṃ vā añchantoti khuddakānaṃ dantasūcivedhakādīnaṃ likhanakāle mandamandaṃ rassaṃ kaḍḍhanto. Evameva khoti evaṃ ayampi bhikkhu addhānavasena ittaravasena ca pavattānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ vasena dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti. Tassevaṃ sikkhato assāsapassāsanimitte cattāri jhānāni uppajjanti, so jhānā vuṭṭhahitvā assāsapassāse vā pariggaṇhāti jhānaṅgāni vā.
在这里,以入出息为业处的人这样观察色法:“这些入出息依什么而生起?依所依处而生起。所依处就是这由父母所生的身体,而这身体就是四大种以及所造色。”之后,他以这个色法为所缘,观察以触为第五的诸名法。这样辨识了名色之后,他寻找名色的因缘,见到以无明等为开端的缘起,于是断除疑惑:“这只是因缘和因缘所生的法而已,并没有另一个有情或人。”他对有因有缘的名色,观照无常、苦、无我三相,不断增长观智,逐渐证得阿拉汉果。这就是一位比丘直到证得阿拉汉果的解脱之门。
Tattha assāsapassāsakammiko ‘‘ime assāsapassāsā kiṃ nissitā? Vatthunissitā. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo, karajakāyo nāma cattāri mahābhūtāni upādārūpañce’’ti evaṃ rūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Tato tadārammaṇe phassapañcamake nāmanti. Evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ pariggahetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesanto avijjādipaṭiccasamuppādaṃ disvā ‘‘paccayapaccayuppannadhammamattamevetaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthī’’ti vitiṇṇakaṅkho sappaccayanāmarūpe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhaṃ.
以禅那为业处的人也是这样:他心里想:“这些禅支依靠什么?它们依靠所依处。所谓所依处,就是这由业所生的身体;禅支属于名,业所生的身体属于色。”确定名色之后,他去寻找它的因缘,看到了以无明等为开端的缘起方式,于是疑惑消除:“这仅仅是由因缘和因缘所生之法罢了,并没有另一个有情或人。”他对有因有缘的名色加上三相,增长观智,逐渐证得阿拉汉果。这就是一位比丘直到阿拉汉果的出离之门。
Jhānakammikopi ‘‘imāni jhānaṅgāni kiṃ nissitāni, vatthunissitāni, vatthu nāma karajakāyo jhānaṅgāni nāmaṃ, karajakāyo rūpa’’nti nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesanto avijjādipaccayākāraṃ disvā ‘‘paccayapaccayuppannadhammamattamevetaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthī’’ti vitiṇṇakaṅkho sappaccayanāmarūpe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idamekassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhaṃ.
“于内”是指:他就这样在自己的入出息身上,修习于身随观身而住。“于外”是指:在别人的入出息身上。“于内外”是指:有时在自己的入出息身上,有时在别人的入出息身上。这是说明他熟练掌握了业处之后,反复交替观察的阶段。不过,在同一个时刻,这两者并不能同时观察到。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā assāsapassāsakāye kāyānupassī viharati. Bahiddhā vāti parassa vā assāsapassāsakāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā vāti kālena attano, kālena parassa assāsapassāsakāye. Etenassa paguṇakammaṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhapetvā aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakālo kathito. Ekasmiṃ kāle panidaṃ ubhayaṃ na labbhati.
随观集法者:就像铁匠依靠风箱、吹管和相应的努力,风才能一次又一次地吹动;同样,比丘依靠所生的身体、鼻孔和心,入出息身才能一次又一次地运行。身体等法是集起之法,观察这些集起之法的人,就称为“于身随观集法而住”。
随观灭法者:就像风箱被拿走、吹管破裂、相应的努力也没有了,那风就不会再吹动;同样,当身体毁坏、鼻孔破损、心灭尽时,所谓的入出息身就不会再运行。这样观察“由于身体等的灭尽,入出息也灭尽”的人,就称为“于身随观灭法而住”。
随观集灭法者:时而观察集,时而观察灭。
“有身”者:只是身存在,而非有情、非人、非女人、非男人、非我、非我所、非我、非属我、非任何人、非任何人的。他的正念如此现前。
Samudayadhammānupassīvāti yathā nāma kammārassa bhastañca gaggaranāḷiñca tajjañca vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto aparāparaṃ sañcarati, evaṃ bhikkhuno karajakāyañca nāsapuṭañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsakāyo aparāparaṃ sañcarati. Kāyādayo dhammā samudayadhammā, te passanto ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati. Vayadhammānupassī vāti yathā bhastāya apanītāya gaggaranāḷiyā bhinnāya tajje ca vāyāme asati so vāto nappavattati, evameva kāye bhinne nāsapuṭe viddhaste citte ca niruddhe assāsapassāsakāyo nāma nappavattatīti kāyādinirodhā assāsapassāsanirodhoti evaṃ passanto ‘‘vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati. Samudayavayadhammānupassī vāti kālena samudayaṃ kālena vayaṃ anupassanto. Atthi kāyoti vā panassāti kāyova atthi, na satto, na puggalo, na itthī, na puriso, na attā, na attaniyaṃ, nāhaṃ, na mama, na koci, na kassacīti evamassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti.
只是这个词,是为了界定目的的界限。这里说的是:那个已经现前的念,并不是为了别的什么目的,而只是为了智的程度,为了让智和念一次又一次地辗转增长、越来越殊胜,也就是为了智的量度以及念的量度,为了增长念与正知。无所依而安住:是指不依止渴爱和邪见而安住。于世间不执取任何:是指对世间的任何色……乃至任何识,都不执取为“这是我或我所”。这里的亦字,是承接上文的意思,表示总括。世尊用这句话,把出入息念这一节的教法交代清楚,并显示出来。
Yāvadevāti payojanaparicchedavavatthāpanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā sā sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, sā na aññadatthāya. Atha kho yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya aparāparaṃ uttaruttari ñāṇapamāṇatthāya ceva satipamāṇatthāya ca, satisampajaññānaṃ vuḍḍhatthāyāti attho. Anissito ca viharatīti taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissayānaṃ vasena anissitova viharati. Na ca kiñci loke upādiyatīti lokasmiṃ kiñci rūpaṃ vā…pe… viññāṇaṃ vā ‘‘ayaṃ me attā vā attaniyaṃ vā’’ti na gaṇhāti. Evampīti upari atthaṃ upādāya sampiṇḍanattho pi-kāro. Iminā pana padena bhagavā ānāpānapabbadesanaṃ niyyātetvā dasseti.
在这里,执持入出息的正念是苦谛;使这正念生起的先前渴爱是集谛;这两者不再生起是灭谛;遍知苦、舍断集、以灭为所缘的圣道是道谛。这样依四谛逐步上进,就达到寂灭。这就是一位比丘以入出息为所缘而精勤修习,直到证得阿拉汉果的解脱之门。
Tattha assāsapassāsapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa assāsapassāsavasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
威仪路品注释
Iriyāpathapabbavaṇṇanā
375375. 像这样,按照入出息来分别解说身随观之后,现在为了按照威仪来分别解说,又说了“复次,比丘们……”等话。在这里,狗、豺狼等行走时当然也知道“我们在走”,但这里说的并不是那样的知道。因为那样的知道不能舍断有情的执见,不能除掉我想,也不能成为业处或念处的修习。可是,这位比丘的知道能舍断有情的执见,能除掉我想,它既是业处,也是念处的修习。这里说的是这样的正知:“谁在走?是谁的走?因为什么而走?”在站立等威仪上,也是同样的道理。
375. Evaṃ assāsapassāsavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni iriyāpathavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha kāmaṃ soṇasiṅgālādayopi gacchantā ‘‘gacchāmā’’ti jānanti, na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpañhi jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ na pajahati, attasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ pajahati, attasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti kammaṭṭhānañceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. Idañhi ‘‘ko gacchati, kassa gamanaṃ, kiṃ kāraṇā gacchatī’’ti evaṃ sampajānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,是谁在走?其实没有任何众生或人在走。那是谁的行走?也不是任何众生或人的行走。为什么走?是因为心所造的风界推动而走。所以,他这样清楚地知道:当“我在走”的心生起时,这个心就引生风,风再引发表色;由于心所造的风界推动,整个身体向前移动,这就叫作行走。站立等其他状态也是同样的道理。
Tattha ko gacchatīti? Na koci satto vā puggalo vā gacchati. Kassa gamananti? Na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā gamanaṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇā gacchatīti ? Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena gacchati. Tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti – ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati , taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalakāyassa purato abhinīhāro gamananti vuccati. Ṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里也一样:当“我站着”这个心生起时,这个心就引生风,风再引生表色;由于心所造的风界的作用,从整个身体的脚底开始,身体挺直的状态,就称为站立。当“我坐着”这个心生起时,这个心就引生风,风再引生表色;由于心所造的风界的作用,下半身弯曲、上半身挺直的状态,就称为坐。当“我躺着”这个心生起时,这个心就引生风,风再引生表色;由于心所造的风界的作用,整个身体横向伸展,就称为躺卧。
Tatrāpi hi ‘‘tiṭṭhāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalakāyassa koṭito paṭṭhāya ussitabhāvo ṭhānanti vuccati. ‘‘Nisīdāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena heṭṭhimakāyassa samiñjanaṃ uparimakāyassa ussitabhāvo nisajjāti vuccati. ‘‘Sayāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalasarīrassa tiriyato pasāraṇaṃ sayananti vuccatīti.
对于这样了知的人,心里会这样想:“有情在走,有情在站。”这种说法只是世俗的表达。但从究竟意义上看,并没有任何一个有情在走或在站。就像人们会说“车在走,车在停”,但实际上并没有一个叫做车的东西在走或在停;只是把四头牛套上车,再由一个熟练的驾车人驱赶,才在世俗层面说“车在走,车在停”。同样地,从不了知的角度来说,身体就像车,心生起的风就像牛,心就像驾车人。当“我在走”“我在站”这样的心念生起时,风界就产生表色;由于心所造的风界的作用,行走等动作才发生。于是,仅仅在世俗层面说“有情在走,有情在站,我在走,我在站”。因此说:
Tassa evaṃ pajānato evaṃ hoti ‘‘satto gacchati, satto tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuccati, atthato pana koci satto gacchanto vā ṭhito vā natthi. Yathā pana ‘‘sakaṭaṃ gacchati, sakaṭaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuccati, na ca kiñci sakaṭaṃ nāma gacchantaṃ vā ṭhitaṃ vā atthi, cattāro pana goṇe yojetvā chekamhi sārathimhi pājente ‘‘sakaṭaṃ gacchati, sakaṭaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vohāramattameva hoti, evameva ajānanaṭṭhena sakaṭaṃ viya kāyo, goṇā viya cittajavātā, sārathi viya cittaṃ. ‘‘Gacchāmi tiṭṭhāmī’’ti citte uppanne vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena gamanādīni pavattanti, tato ‘‘satto gacchati, satto tiṭṭhati, ahaṃ gacchāmi, ahaṃ tiṭṭhāmī’’ti vohāramattaṃ hoti. Tenāha –
“如船借风力而行,如箭借弦力而发;
此身亦如此,它是被风所击而行的。
就像木偶唯由线绳牵引一样,这个也唯由心线牵引。
这个身体机关一旦被驱动,就能行走、站立、坐下。
这里,那个没有因和缘的众生,究竟是什么呢?
凭他自己的威神力,无论是站立还是行走。”
‘‘Nāvā mālutavegena, jiyāvegena tejanaṃ; Yathā yāti tathā kāyo, yāti vātāhato ayaṃ. Yantaṃ suttavaseneva, cittasuttavasenidaṃ; Payuttaṃ kāyayantampi, yāti ṭhāti nisīdati. Ko nāma ettha so satto, yo vinā hetupaccaye; Attano ānubhāvena, tiṭṭhe vā yadi vā vaje’’ti.
因此,应当这样理解:当这位修行者观察行走等动作只是依因缘条件而生起时,他在行走时清楚地知道“我在行走”,站立时清楚地知道“我在站立”,坐着时清楚地知道“我在坐着”,躺卧时清楚地知道“我在躺卧”。
Tasmā evaṃ hetupaccayavaseneva pavattāni gamanādīni sallakkhento esa ‘‘gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā, nisinno vā, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātī’’ti veditabbo.
无论身体被摆成什么姿势,他都按那个样子清楚地知道它——这是一句总括一切的话。这里说的是:身体以哪种姿态安住,他就以那种姿态清楚地知道它。身体以行走的姿态安住时,他清楚地知道“在走”;以站立、坐着、躺卧的姿态安住时,他清楚地知道“站着”“坐着”“躺着”。
Yathā yathā vā panassa kāyo paṇihito hoti, tathā tathā naṃ pajānātīti sabbasaṅgāhikavacanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena yena vā ākārenassa kāyo ṭhito hoti, tena tena naṃ pajānāti. Gamanākārena ṭhitaṃ gacchatīti pajānāti. Ṭhānanisajjasayanākārena ṭhitaṃ sayānoti pajānātīti.
“或于内”是指:像这样通过观察自己的四种威仪,于身随观身而住。“或于外”是指:通过观察他人的四种威仪。“或于内外”是指:有时观察自己的四种威仪,有时观察他人的四种威仪,于身随观身而住。“于集法随观”等句中,则应依“无明集故色集”等理路,以五种方式引出对色蕴的集起与灭去的观察。这里所说的“于集法随观”等,正是针对这一点而说。“或者,有‘身’的念现起”等,则与前面所说相同。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Bahiddhā vāti parassa vā catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena. Ajjhattabahiddhā vāti kālena attano, kālena parassa catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vātiādīsu pana avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayotiādinā nayena pañcahākārehi rūpakkhandhassa samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Tañhi sandhāya idha ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atthi kāyoti vā panassātiādi vuttasadisameva.
在这里也一样:把握四威仪的念是苦谛,使它生起的先前渴爱是集谛,两者不再生起是灭谛,遍知苦、舍断集、以灭为所缘的圣道是道谛。这样依四圣谛逐步提升,最终证得涅槃——这就是一位把握四威仪的比丘直至阿拉汉果的出离之门。
Idhāpi catuiriyāpathapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa catuiriyāpathapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
四正知品的注释
Catusampajaññapabbavaṇṇanā
376376. 这样按行住坐卧的威仪把身随观分别说明之后,现在为了按四正知来分别说明,又说“再者……”等语。其中,“前进”等词已在《沙门果经》中解释过。经文说“或于内”,意思是:像这样以四正知来摄持,无论是对自己的身体、对他人的身体,或有时对自己的身体、有时对他人的身体,都安住于身随观。在这里,“随观集灭法”等句中,也应当只取色蕴的集与灭。其余部分与前面所说相同。
376. Evaṃ iriyāpathavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni catusampajaññavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha . Tattha abhikkantetiādīni sāmaññaphale vaṇṇitāni. Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ catusampajaññapariggaṇhanena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Idhāpi samudayavayadhammānupassītiādīsu rūpakkhandhasseva samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Sesaṃ vuttasadisameva.
在这里,以四正知摄持的念是苦圣谛;使它生起的先前渴爱是集圣谛;这两者不再生起是灭圣谛;前面所说的圣道是道圣谛。这样依四圣谛逐步上进,最终证得寂灭——这就是就一位以四正知摄持的比丘而言,直至阿拉汉果的解脱门。
Idha catusampajaññapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, vuttappakāro ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa catusampajaññapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno vasena yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
厌恶作意部分的注释
Paṭikūlamanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
377377. 这样从四正知的角度分析了身随观之后,现在为了从厌恶作意的角度来分析,又说了“再者……”等话。其中,关于“即此身……”等所有应当说明的内容,在《清净道论》的“身至念业处”中已经全面详尽地讲述过了。“两端有口的”:就是与下方和上方两个口相连。“种种种类的”:就是各式各样的。
377. Evaṃ catusampajaññavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni paṭikūlamanasikāravasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha imameva kāyantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ sabbākārena vitthārato visuddhimagge kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhāne vuttaṃ. Ubhatomukhāti heṭṭhā ca upari cāti dvīhi mukhehi yuttā. Nānāvihitassāti nānāvidhassa.
这里说的是譬喻的对应关系:这个身体由四大组成,就像一只两头开口的袋子;装在袋子里混杂的各种谷物,就像头发等三十二身分;明眼人,就像禅修者;他解开那只袋子来观察时,各种谷物清楚显现的那一刻,就应当理解为禅修者的三十二身分变得分明的时候。因此,“或于内……”的意思是:像这样通过把握头发等身分,在自己的身上、在他人的身上,或有时在自己身上、有时在他人身上,于身随观身而住。从这里往后,都按照前面所说的方式理解。只是在这里,执持三十二身分的念就是苦圣谛——这样联系起来之后,应当知道这就是出离的入口。其余部分和前面相同。
Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – ubhatomukhā putoḷi viya hi cātumahābhūtiko kāyo, tattha missetvā pakkhittanānāvidhadhaññaṃ viya kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, cakkhumā puriso viya yogāvacaro, tassa taṃ putoḷiṃ muñcitvā paccavekkhato nānāvidhadhaññassa pākaṭakālo viya yogino dvattiṃsākārassa vibhūtakālo veditabbo. Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ kesādipariggaṇhanena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha dvattiṃsākārapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
界作意部分的注释
Dhātumanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
378378. 这样,通过厌恶作意分别了身随观之后,现在为了通过界作意来分别,又说了“再者……”等话。这里,连同譬喻对应的义理解释如下:就像某个屠牛者,或者他那个以饭食和工钱雇佣的徒弟,把牛杀了、剖开之后,在通往四个方向的大路中间——也就是所谓“十字路口”的地方,把肉一块一块地切开,然后坐在那里;同样地,比丘无论以四种威仪中的哪一种安住,就依照身体当时安住的样子,按照它当时被摆放的样子,这样观察:“在这个身体里,有地界……乃至……风界。”
378. Evaṃ paṭikūlamanasikāravasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni dhātumanasikāravasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ opammasaṃsandanena saddhiṃ atthavaṇṇanā – yathā koci goghātako vā tasseva vā bhattavetanabhato antevāsiko gāviṃ vadhitvā vinivijjhitvā catasso disā gatānaṃ mahāpathānaṃ vemajjhaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte catumahāpathe koṭṭhāsaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā nisinno assa, evameva bhikkhu catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ yena kenaci ākārena ṭhitattā yathāṭhitaṃ, yathāṭhitattā ca yathāpaṇihitaṃ kāyaṃ ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu…pe… vāyodhātū’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhati.
这段话要说明的是:就像屠牛的人,无论是养牛的时候、把牛牵去屠宰场的时候、牵到那里绑好放着的时候、正在杀的时候,还是看见牛已经被杀死的时候,只要他还没有把牛剖开、切成一块一块,在那之前,“牛”这个想(认知)就一直不会消失。可是,等他剖开切好、坐下来之后,“牛”的想就消失了,“肉”的想就现起了。他不会这样想:“我在卖牛,这些人在把牛带走。”而是会这样想:“我在卖肉,这些人在把肉带走。”同样地,这位比丘以前还是愚痴凡夫的时候,不管是在家人时期还是出家之后,只要他还没有把这个就这样安住、就这样摆放的身体破除密集(固体形态),没有从界的角度去观察,在那之前,“有情”或“人”的想就一直不会消失。可是,当他从界的角度去观察时,“有情”的想就消失了,心就只依于诸界而安住。因此世尊说:“他如其所住、如其所安立地观察此身:‘在此身中,有地界、水界、火界、风界。’比丘们,就像一位熟练的屠牛者……乃至……风界。”这里,禅修者就像屠牛者,“牛”的想就像“有情”的想,四衢大路就像四种威仪,剖开切成一块块后坐下来的状态就像从界的角度观察。这就是这里对巴利文的解释。至于业处(禅修方法)的详细说明,则在《清净道论》中已经广说了。
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā goghātakassa gāviṃ posentassāpi āghātanaṃ āharantassāpi āharitvā tattha bandhitvā ṭhapentassapi vadhentassāpi vadhitaṃ mataṃ passantassāpi tāvadeva gāvīti saññā na antaradhāyati, yāva naṃ padāletvā bilaso na vibhajati. Vibhajitvā nisinnassa panassa gāvīti saññā antaradhāyati, maṃsasaññā pavattati. Nāssa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘ahaṃ gāviṃ vikkiṇāmi, ime gāviṃ harantī’’ti. Atha khvassa ‘‘ahaṃ maṃsaṃ vikkiṇāmi, ime maṃsaṃ haranti’’ cceva hoti; evameva imassāpi bhikkhuno pubbe bālaputhujjanakāle gihibhūtassāpi pabbajitassāpi tāvadeva sattoti vā puggaloti vā saññā na antaradhāyati, yāva imameva kāyaṃ yathāṭhitaṃ yathāpaṇihitaṃ ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā dhātuso na paccavekkhati. Dhātuso paccavekkhato panassa sattasaññā antaradhāyati, dhātuvaseneva cittaṃ santiṭṭhati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘‘imameva kāyaṃ yathāṭhitaṃ yathāpaṇihitaṃ dhātuso paccavekkhati ‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho goghātako vā…pe… vāyodhātū’’ti. Goghātako viya hi yogī, gāvīti saññā viya sattasaññā, catumahāpatho viya catuiriyāpatho, bilaso vibhajitvā nisinnabhāvo viya dhātuso paccavekkhaṇanti ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanā. Kammaṭṭhānakathā pana visuddhimagge vitthāritā.
或于内这句的意思是:像这样通过把握四界,他于自己的身体或别人的身体,或有时于自己的身体、有时于别人的身体,安住于身随观。从这里往后,和前面所说的方法一样。只是在这里,应当把以四界把握的念理解为苦圣谛,这样连接起来后,要知道这就是出离的入口;其余部分和前面相同。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ catudhātupariggaṇhanena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha catudhātupariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ, sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
九种墓地节的注释
Navasivathikapabbavaṇṇanā
379379. 像这样,以界作意的方式分析完身随观之后,现在要用九种墓地节来分析,于是又说“再者”等话。其中,“就像看见”意思是如同看见。“身体”指死尸。“丢弃在墓地”指扔在坟场里。“一日死者的”就是死了一天的。“二日死者的”就是死了两天的。“三日死者的”就是死了三天的。犹如铁匠的风箱,因寿命耗尽,风依次生起而膨胀,以膨胀的状态就是“肿胀”;“肿胀”本身就是“肿胀的”;或者因为令人厌恶,是可厌的肿胀,颜色变异败坏就是“青瘀”;“青瘀”本身就是“青瘀的”;或者因为令人厌恶,是可厌的青瘀,在肉厚处呈红色、在脓汁积聚处呈白色、而大部分在青色处呈青色的,犹如披着青布的尸体,这就是它的名称。从破裂处或九种疮口流出的脓就是“流脓”;“流脓”本身就是“流脓的”;或者因为令人厌恶,是可厌的流脓,已生流脓、达到那种状态就是“已生流脓”。
379. Evaṃ dhātumanasikāravasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni navahi sivathikapabbehi vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha seyyathāpi passeyyāti yathā passeyya. Sarīranti matasarīraṃ. Sivathikāya chaḍḍitanti susāne apaviddhaṃ. Ekāhaṃ matassa assāti ekāhamataṃ. Dvīhaṃ matassa assāti dvīhamataṃ. Tīhaṃ matassa assāti tīhamataṃ. Kammārabhastā viya vāyunā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā yathānukkamaṃ samuggatena sūnabhāvena uddhumātattā uddhumātaṃ, uddhumātameva uddhumātakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ uddhumātanti uddhumātakaṃ. Vinīlaṃ vuccati viparibhinnavaṇṇaṃ, vinīlameva vinīlakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vinīlanti vinīlakaṃ. Maṃsussadaṭṭhānesu rattavaṇṇassa pubbasannicayaṭṭhānesu setavaṇṇassa yebhuyyena ca nīlavaṇṇassa nīlaṭṭhānesu nīlasāṭakapārutasseva chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paribhinnaṭṭhānehi navahi vā vaṇamukhehi vissandamānapubbaṃ vipubbaṃ, vipubbameva vipubbakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vipubbanti vipubbakaṃ. Vipubbakaṃ jātaṃ tathābhāvaṃ gatanti vipubbakajātaṃ.
这位比丘把自身的这个身体,用智慧与那个身体联系起来、对照起来。怎么联系呢?就是:“这个身体也是这种性质,也会变成那种样子,也逃不过那种结局。”这里说的是:因为有寿、暖、识这三种法的存在,这个身体才能站立、行走等等;一旦这三样离开了,这个身体也同样具有这种性质,本质上就是会腐烂的;也会变成那种样子,也就是会肿胀、膨胀等;也逃不过那种结局,就是逃不过肿胀、膨胀等状态。这样,通过把握肿胀等相,或者对自己身体,或者对他人身体,或者一时对自己、一时对他人,安住于身随观。
So imameva kāyanti so bhikkhu imaṃ attano kāyaṃ tena kāyena saddhiṃ ñāṇena upasaṃharati upaneti. Kathaṃ? Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatītoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – āyu, usmā, viññāṇanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ atthitāya ayaṃ kāyo ṭhānagamanādikhamo hoti, imesaṃ pana vigamā ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃ pūtikasabhāvoyeva, evaṃbhāvī evaṃ uddhumātādibhedo bhavissati, evaṃanatīto evaṃ uddhumātādibhāvaṃ anatikkantoti. Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ uddhumātādipariggaṇhanena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
正在被啃食的:指乌鸦等落在腹部等处,反复扯下腹肉、唇肉、眼角肉等,正在被吃掉的尸体。还带着肉和血:指还有残余的肉和血连在一起。无肉而涂满血:即使肉已经没了,血还没有干,针对这种情况说“无肉而涂满血”。从别处:指从另一个方向。手骨:即使手骨分成六十四块,也各自分散开来。足骨等也应同样理解。
Khajjamānanti udarādīsu nisīditvā udaramaṃsaoṭṭhamaṃsaakkhikūṭādīni luñcitvā luñcitvā khādiyamānaṃ. Samaṃsalohitanti sāvasesamaṃsalohitayuttaṃ. Nimaṃsalohitamakkhitanti maṃse khīṇepi lohitaṃ na sussati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nimaṃsalohitamakkhita’’nti. Aññenāti aññena disābhāgena. Hatthaṭṭhikanti catusaṭṭhibhedampi hatthaṭṭhikaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ vippakiṇṇaṃ. Pādaṭṭhikādīsupi eseva nayo.
“超过年的”是指超过一年的。“腐烂的”是指放在露天,受风吹、日晒、雨淋,超过一年就腐烂了;但埋在地下的则能存留更久。“变成粉末的”是指碎成粉末、四处散开。在所有这些情形中,都应按照“就自己的身体”等所说的方式,依被吃等状态来套用。如此,以把握被吃等相,直到变成粉末的状态,或于自身,或于他身,或有时于自身、有时于他身,于身随观身而住。
Terovassikānīti atikkantasaṃvaccharāni. Pūtīnīti abbhokāse ṭhitāni vātātapavuṭṭhisamphassena terovassikāneva pūtīni honti, antobhūmigatāni pana cirataraṃ tiṭṭhanti. Cuṇṇakajātānīti cuṇṇaṃ cuṇṇaṃ hutvā vippakiṇṇāni. Sabbattha so imamevāti vuttanayena khajjamānādīnaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā. Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ khajjamānādipariggaṇhanena yāva cuṇṇakabhāvā attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
在这里停下来之后,要把九种墓地合在一起说。也就是:按“死后一日”这类方式所说的一切,算作一种;“被乌鸦等啄食”这类,算作一种;“骨锁、带肉带血、由筋连着”算作一种;“没有肉、涂着血、由筋连着”算作一种;“肉和血都已去掉、由筋连着”算作一种;“骨头已经散开”这类算作一种;“骨头变白、像螺壳颜色”算作一种;“堆在一起超过一年”算作一种;“腐烂、变成粉末”算作一种。
Idha pana ṭhatvā navasivathikā samodhānetabbā. Ekāhamataṃ vāti hi ādinā nayena vuttā sabbāpi ekā, kākehi vā khajjamānantiādikā ekā, aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṃ samaṃsalohitaṃ nhārusambandhanti ekā, nimaṃsalohitamakkhitaṃ nhārusambandhanti ekā, apagatamaṃsalohitaṃ nhārusambandhanti ekā, aṭṭhikāni apagatasambandhānītiādikā ekā aṭṭhikāni setāni saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgānīti ekā, puñjakitāni terovassikānīti ekā, pūtīni cuṇṇakajātānīti ekāti.
“比丘们,就是这样。”——这是世尊在开示了九种墓地之后,为结束身随观而说的。其中,专注于九种墓地的念是苦谛;使这念生起的先前渴爱是集谛;这两者不再生起是灭谛;了知苦、断除集、以灭为所缘的圣道是道谛。这样,依照四谛逐步提升,最终达到寂灭——这就是专注于九种墓地的比丘们直至证得阿拉汉果的导引入口。
Evaṃ kho, bhikkhaveti idaṃ navasivathikā dassetvā kāyānupassanaṃ niṭṭhapento āha. Tattha navasivathikapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idaṃ navasivathikapariggāhakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
到这里,入出息节、威仪节、四正知节、厌恶作意节、界作意节、九种墓地节——这十四节的身随观就讲完了。其中,入出息节和厌恶作意节这两种只是安止业处;而墓地节是依过患随观来说的,所以其余十二种都只是近行业处。
Ettāvatā ca ānāpānapabbaṃ, iriyāpathapabbaṃ, catusampajaññapabbaṃ, paṭikūlamanasikārapabbaṃ, dhātumanasikārapabbaṃ, navasivathikapabbānīti cuddasapabbā kāyānupassanā niṭṭhitā hoti. Tattha ānāpānapabbaṃ, paṭikūlamanasikārapabbanti imāneva dve appanākammaṭṭhānāni, sivathikānaṃ pana ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttattā sesāni dvādasāpi upacārakammaṭṭhānānevāti.
受随观的注释
Vedanānupassanāvaṇṇanā
380世尊这样用十四种方式讲完身随观念处之后,现在为了接着用九种方式讲受随观,就说了“那么,比丘们……”等话。其中,“乐受”的意思是:当他在体验身体的或心理的乐受时,他清楚地知道“我正在体验乐受”。当然,即使是还躺在床上的婴儿,在吃奶等时候体验到乐受,也知道“我在体验乐受”,但这里说的并不是那种知道。因为那种知道并没有舍弃对“有情”的执取,没有破除“我”想,既不是业处,也不是念处的修行。而这位比丘的知道,则舍弃了对“有情”的执取,破除了“我”想,既是业处,也是念处的修行。因为这里说的是那种带着正知的体验,并且这样观察:“是谁在体验?这是谁的受?受是因什么而起的?”
380. Evaṃ bhagavā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sukhaṃ vedananti kāyikaṃ vā cetasikaṃ vā sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘ahaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānātīti attho. Tattha kāmaṃ uttānaseyyakāpi dārakā thaññapivanādikāle sukhaṃ vedayamānā ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmā’’ti pajānanti, na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpañhi jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ na jahati, attasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ jahati, attasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānañceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. Idañhi ‘‘ko vedayati, kassa vedanā, kiṃ kāraṇā vedanā’’ti evaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
在这里,是谁在感受?并没有任何一个众生或人在感受。感受是谁的?感受不属于任何众生或人。感受是因为什么而有的?其实,感受只是以依处和所缘为条件才生起的。所以,他这样清楚地知道:以某种乐等事物为所缘,只是受在感受;而依赖受的生起,才在世俗说法上说“我在感受”,这只不过是一种假名而已。应当知道,这样观察“以依处和所缘为条件,只有受在感受”的人,就是在清楚地了知“我感受乐受”,就像心山的那位长老一样。
Tattha ko vedayatīti na koci satto vā puggalo vā vedayati. Kassa vedanāti na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā vedanā. Kiṃ kāraṇā vedanāti vatthuārammaṇāva panassa vedanā, tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti ‘‘taṃ taṃ sukhādīnaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayati taṃ pana vedanāya pavattiṃ upādāya’ahaṃ vedayāmī’ti vohāramattaṃ hotī’’ti. Evaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti sallakkhento esa ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātī’’ti veditabbo cittalapabbate aññataratthero viya.
据说,那位长老生病时,被强烈的痛受逼得不断呻吟,翻来覆去。一个年轻比丘问他:“尊者,您到底是哪里在痛?”长老说:“贤友,并没有什么单独的‘痛的地方’,只是以身体为所缘,受在感受罢了。”年轻比丘说:“尊者,既然从能这样了知的时候起,就应该能忍得住,不是吗?”长老说:“贤友,我在忍。”年轻比丘说:“尊者,能忍才是更好的。”长老就忍住了。那风一直撕裂到心脏,肠子都堆到了床上。长老指给年轻比丘看:“贤友,这样的忍耐,还算可以吧。”年轻比丘沉默了。长老于是平衡精进,与诸无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果,成为等头者而般涅槃。
Thero kira aphāsukakāle balavavedanāya nitthunanto aparāparaṃ parivattati, tameko daharo āha – ‘‘kataraṃ vo, bhante, ṭhānaṃ rujjatī’’ti. Āvuso, pāṭiyekkaṃ rujjanaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi, vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti. Evaṃ jānanakālato paṭṭhāya adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati no, bhante,ti. Adhivāsemi, āvusoti. Adhivāsanā, bhante, seyyoti. Thero adhivāsesi. Vāto yāva hadayā phālesi, mañcake antāni rāsikatāni ahesuṃ. Thero daharassa dassesi ‘‘vaṭṭatāvuso, ettakā adhivāsanā’’ti. Daharo tuṇhī ahosi. Thero vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitvā samasīsī hutvā parinibbāyi.
就像对乐受一样,对苦受……中间省略……当他正在体验无染着的不苦不乐受时,他清楚地知道:我正在体验无染着的不苦不乐受。世尊就这样讲完色业处之后,接着讲无色业处。因为如果依触或依心来讲,所讲的内容就不清楚,看起来像一片黑暗;但受的生起是清楚的,所以依受来讲就变得清楚。因此,这里和《帝释问经》一样,也是依受来讲无色业处。其中,业处有两种,即色业处和无色业处,这类论述应当按照《帝释问经》里所说的方式来理解。
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Iti bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento yasmā phassavasena cittavasena vā kathiyamānaṃ pākaṭaṃ na hoti , andhakāraṃ viya khāyati, vedanānaṃ pana uppattipākaṭatāya vedanāvasena pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmā sakkapañhe viya idhāpi vedanāvasena arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi. Tattha ‘‘duvidhañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ arūpakammaṭṭhānañcā’’tiādi kathāmaggo sakkapañhe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
在这里,“乐受”等说法中,还有另一种了知的方式:当他感受乐受时,了知“我感受乐受”。因为在乐受生起的那一刻,苦受并不存在,所以正在感受乐受时,他了知“我感受的只是乐受”。由于过去曾经生起的苦受现在已不存在,而这个乐受在此之前也不存在,因此受是无常的、不持久的、会变坏的法。这样,他在那时就具足正知。世尊也这样说过:
Tattha sukhaṃ vedanantiādīsu ayaṃ aparopi pajānanapariyāyo, sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātīti sukhavedanākkhaṇe dukkhavedanāya abhāvato sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃyeva vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Tena yā pubbe bhūtapubbā dukkhavedanā, tassa idāni abhāvato imissā ca sukhāya vedanāya ito paṭhamaṃ abhāvato vedanā nāma aniccā adhuvā vipariṇāmadhammā, itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿吉韦萨那,当一个人正在体验乐受时,那时他既不体验苦受,也不体验不苦不乐受,只体验乐受。阿吉韦萨那,当他正在体验苦受……中略……正在体验不苦不乐受时,那时他既不体验乐受,也不体验苦受,只体验不苦不乐受。阿吉韦萨那,乐受也是无常的、有为的、缘生的,是灭尽法、衰灭法、离贪法、灭法。阿吉韦萨那,苦受也是……中略……阿吉韦萨那,不苦不乐受也是无常的……中略……是灭法。阿吉韦萨那,这样观察的多闻圣弟子,对乐受也厌离,对苦受也厌离,对不苦不乐受也厌离;因为厌离而离贪,因为离贪而解脱;解脱时,生起“我已解脱”的智,他了知:“生已尽,梵行已立,应作已作,不再有此后世。”
‘‘Yasmiṃ, aggivessana, samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, sukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Yasmiṃ, aggivessana, samaye dukkhaṃ…pe… adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, adukkhamasukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Sukhāpi, kho, aggivessana, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Dukkhāpi, kho…pe… adukkhamasukhāpi kho, aggivessana, vedanā aniccā…pe… nirodhadhammā. Evaṃ passaṃ, aggivessana, sutavā ariyasāvako sukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, dukkhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, adukkhamasukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, vimuttasmiṃ ‘vimuttamī’ti ñāṇaṃ hoti, ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ, nāparaṃ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.205).
在“有染的乐”等说法中,“有染的乐”是指六种依靠在家生活的喜受,它们依赖于对五种欲乐的染著。“离染的乐”是指六种依靠出离生活的喜受。“有染的苦”是指六种依靠在家生活的忧受。“离染的苦”是指六种依靠出离生活的忧受。“有染的不苦不乐”是指六种依靠在家生活的舍受。“离染的不苦不乐”是指六种依靠出离生活的舍受。这些受的详细分别,在《帝释问经》中已经说过了。
Sāmisaṃ vā sukhantiādīsu sāmisā sukhā nāma pañcakāmaguṇāmisasannissitā cha gehasitasomanassavedanā. Nirāmisā sukhā nāma cha nekkhammasitasomanassavedanā. Sāmisā dukkhā nāma cha gehasitadomanassavedanā. Nirāmisā dukkhā nāma cha nekkhammasitadomanassavedanā. Sāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha gehasitaupekkhāvedanā. Nirāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha nekkhammasitaupekkhāvedanā. Tāsaṃ vibhāgo sakkapañhe vuttoyeva.
“或于内”这句是说:像这样通过把握乐受等,比丘安住于随观受——或者观察自己的受,或者观察他人的受,有时观察自己的受,有时观察他人的受。
“随观集灭法者”这里,应当依据“由无明集而有受集”等,以五种五相来观察受的集起与灭去,由此应知:“安住于受中随观集法,安住于受中随观灭法,有时安住于受中随观集法,有时安住于受中随观灭法。”
此后的解释,与身随观部分所说的方法完全一致。这里唯一的差别是:把执取受的正念视为苦谛,这样结合之后,便能了知那位执取受的比丘的解脱门;其余一切,都与前面相同。
Itiajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ sukhavedanādipariggaṇhanena attano vā vedanāsu, parassa vā vedanāsu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati. Samudayavayadhammānupassī vāti ettha pana avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayotiādīhi pañcahi pañcahi ākārehi vedanānaṃ samudayañca vayañca passanto ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, kālena samudayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu, kālena vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharatī’’ti veditabbo. Ito paraṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha vedanāpariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā vedanāpariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ, sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
心随观的注释
Cittānupassanāvaṇṇanā
381381. 像这样用九种方式讲完受随观念处之后,现在为了用十六种方式讲心随观,说了“云何,诸比丘”等话。其中,“有贪”指与八种贪俱行的心。“离贪”指世间的善心和无记心。不过,因为这里是遍察(sammasana),不是法的总集(dhammasamodhāna),所以在这里,即使是一类之中也找不到出世间心。其余四种不善心,既不归入前一类,也不归入后一类。“有嗔”指与两种忧俱行的心。“离嗔”指世间的善心和无记心。其余十种不善心,同样既不归入前一类,也不归入后一类。“有痴”指与疑俱行的心和与掉举俱行的心,共两种。然而,因为痴在一切不善心中都会生起,所以其余的(不善心)在这里也都适用。实际上,就在这二分之中,十二种不善心已经全部涵盖。“离痴”指世间的善心和无记心。“昏昧”指被昏沉和睡眠所随逐的心,这种心就叫作“蜷缩的心”。“散乱”指与掉举俱行的心,这种心就叫作“涣散的心”。
381. Evaṃ navavidhena vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sarāganti aṭṭhavidhalobhasahagataṃ. Vītarāganti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Idaṃ pana yasmā sammasanaṃ na dhammasamodhānaṃ tasmā idha ekapadepi lokuttaraṃ na labbhati. Sesāni cattāri akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Sadosanti duvidhadomanassasahagataṃ. Vītadosanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Sesāni dasa akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Samohanti vicikicchāsahagatañceva, uddhaccasahagatañcāti duvidhaṃ. Yasmā pana moho sabbākusalesu uppajjati, tasmā sesānipi idha vaṭṭantiyeva. Imasmiññeva hi duke dvādasākusalacittāni pariyādinnānīti. Vītamohanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Saṅkhittanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ. Etañhi saṅkuṭitacittaṃ nāma. Vikkhittanti uddhaccasahagataṃ, etañhi pasaṭacittaṃ nāma.
广大指色界和无色界的心。不广大指欲界的心。有上指欲界的心。无上指色界和无色界的心。在这两者当中,色界仍然是有上,只有无色界才是无上。有定指具有安止定或近行定的心。无定指不具备这两种定的心。解脱指通过彼分断和镇伏断而解脱的心。不解脱指不具备这两种解脱的心。至于正断、止息、出离这三种解脱,在这里则没有讨论的余地。
Mahaggatanti rūpārūpāvacaraṃ. Amahaggatanti kāmāvacaraṃ. Sauttaranti kāmāvacaraṃ. Anuttaranti rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacarañca. Tatrāpi sauttaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ, anuttaraṃ arūpāvacarameva. Samāhitanti yassa appanāsamādhi upacārasamādhi vā atthi. Asamāhitanti ubhayasamādhivirahitaṃ . Vimuttanti tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vimuttaṃ. Avimuttanti ubhayavimuttivirahitaṃ. Samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīnaṃ pana idha okāsova natthi.
“如此内”这句是说:像这样,通过把握有贪等状态,在每一个刹那,无论哪种心生起,他都清楚地观察那个心——或者观察自己的心,或者观察他人的心;有时观察自己的心,有时观察他人的心;他就这样安住,随观于心。
“随观集法与灭法”这一部分,则应当依照“由无明集起而有识集起”这样的方式,以五种五相来阐明识的集起与灭去。此后的解释,和前文所说的方法相同。
这里唯一的差别是:把执取心的正念看作苦谛,这样把句子结合起来之后,就能了解那位随观心的比丘的解脱门;其余部分完全一样。
Itiajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ sarāgādipariggaṇhanena yasmiṃ yasmiṃ khaṇe yaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ pavattati, taṃ taṃ sallakkhento attano vā citte, parassa vā citte, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa citte cittānupassī viharati. Samudayavayadhammānupassīti ettha pana avijjāsamudayā viññāṇasamudayoti evaṃ pañcahi pañcahi ākārehi viññāṇassa samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha cittapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ padayojanaṃ katvā cittapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
法随观中盖品的注释
Dhammānupassanā nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
382世尊用这十六种方式讲完心随观念处之后,现在为了用五种方式讲法随观,就说了“云何,比丘们……”等等。另外,世尊在身随观中讲的是对纯粹色法的把握,在受随观和心随观中讲的是对纯粹非色法的把握。现在为了讲对色法与非色法混杂的把握,就说了“云何,比丘们……”等等。或者也可以这样理解:在身随观中只讲了对色蕴的把握,在受随观中只讲了对受蕴的把握,在心随观中只讲了对识蕴的把握;现在为了也讲对想蕴和行蕴的把握,就说了“云何,比丘们……”等等。
382. Evaṃ soḷasavidhena cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Apica bhagavatā kāyānupassanāya suddharūpapariggaho kathito, vedanācittānupassanāhi suddhaarūpapariggaho. Idāni rūpārūpamissakapariggahaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Kāyānupassanāya vā rūpakkhandhapariggahova kathito, vedanānupassanāya vedanākkhandhapariggahova, cittānupassanāya viññāṇakkhandhapariggahova idāni saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampi kathetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“存在”是指因为反复现起而存在的。“不存在”是指因为不现起,或者因为已经被断除而不存在的。“以及如何”是指由于什么原因,欲贪得以生起。“他也了知那种”是指他了知那种原因。按照这个方法,所有语句的含义都应当这样理解。
Tattha santanti abhiṇhasamudācāravasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Asantanti asamudācāravasena vā pahīnattā vā asaṃvijjamānaṃ. Yathā cāti yena kāraṇena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Tañca pajānātīti tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Iti iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
在这里,由于对净相的不如理作意,贪欲就生起。所谓净相,可爱的事物是净相,可爱的所缘也是净相。所谓不如理作意,就是不当的作意、偏离正道的作意,比如把无常当作常、把苦当作乐、把无我当作我、把不净当作净的作意。如果反复不断地这样作意,贪欲就会生起。因此世尊说:“比丘们,有净相,如果对它频繁地作不如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的贪欲生起的食物,也是让已经生起的贪欲进一步增长、扩大的食物。”(《相应部》5.232)
Tattha subhanimitte ayonisomanasikārena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Subhanimittaṃ nāma subhampi subhanimittaṃ, subhārammaṇampi subhanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro nāma anupāyamanasikāro uppathamanasikāro anicce niccanti vā, dukkhe sukhanti vā, anattani attāti vā, asubhe subhanti vā manasikāro. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, subhanimittaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
不过,对不净相作如理作意,贪欲就会被断除。所谓“不净相”,指的是不净本身,也包括以不净为所缘的对象。所谓“如理作意”,就是正确的作意、正当的作意,也就是对无常作无常想,对苦作苦想,对无我作无我想,对不净作不净想。一个人如果在那里反复不断地这样作意,贪欲就会被断除。因此世尊说:“比丘们,有不净相,在那里频繁地作如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的贪欲不生起的食,也是让已经生起的贪欲被断除的食。”(《相应部》5.232)
Asubhanimitte pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Asubhanimittaṃ nāma asubhampi asubhārammaṇampi. Yonisomanasikāro nāma upāyamanasikāro pathamanasikāro anicce aniccanti vā, dukkhe dukkhanti vā, anattani anattāti vā, asubhe asubhanti vā manasikāro. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, asubhanimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除欲贪:修习不净相、持续修不净观、守护根门、饮食知量、亲近善知识、适当的谈话。因为,修习十种不净相的人能断除欲贪,修习不净观的人也能断除,守护根门的人也能断除,饮食知量的人——在还剩四五口饭时,喝水就能维持身体——也能断除。因此说:
Apica cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattanti asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Dasavidhañhi asubhanimittaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati, bhāventassāpi indriyesu pihitadvārassāpi catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ ālopānaṃ okāse sati udakaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlatāya bhojanamattaññunopi. Teneva vuttaṃ –
“饭留四五口不食,以水代之;
发心精进之比丘,如是足以安住于安乐。”
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
亲近像不净观行者阿苏跋坎米咖·帝萨长老那样、乐于修习不净观的善知识,欲贪也会被断除;在站、坐等姿势中,通过谈论与十种不净相关的合适话题,欲贪也会被断除。因此说:“六法能导向欲贪的断除。”而以此六法断除了欲贪之后,他了知:依阿拉汉道,未来不再生起。
Asubhakammikatissattherasadise asubhabhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassapi kāmacchando pahīyati, ṭhānanisajjādīsu dasaasubhanissitasappāyakathāya pahīyati, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnakāmacchandassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
面对嗔恨相时,如果不如理作意,嗔恨就会生起。这里,嗔恨本身就是嗔恨相,嗔恨的所缘也是嗔恨相。不如理作意在任何情况下性质都是一样的。当人于那个相上反复地让不如理作意现起,嗔恨就会生起。因此世尊说:“比丘们,有嗔恨相,在那里反复不如理作意,这就是让未生的嗔恨生起、让已生的嗔恨增长广大的食。”
Paṭighanimitte ayonisomanasikārena pana byāpādassa uppādo hoti. Tattha paṭighampi paṭighanimittaṃ , paṭighārammaṇampi paṭighanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro sabbattha ekalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tasmiṃ nimitte bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, paṭighanimittaṃ , tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa uppādāya uppannassa vā byāpādassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
不过,依靠慈心解脱和如理作意,嗔恚就会被断除。这里说到“慈”的时候,安止和近行都算。“心解脱”则只指安止。如理作意的特征前面已经说过。如果在这上面反复不断地用功,嗔恚就会被断除。所以世尊说:“比丘们,有慈心解脱,在那里反复不断地如理作意,这就是让还没生起的嗔恚不生起、让已经生起的嗔恚被断除的食。”
Mettāya pana cetovimuttiyā yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tattha mettāti vutte appanāpi upacāropi vaṭṭati. Cetovimuttīti appanāva. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, mettā cetovimutti, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā byāpādassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除嗔恨:取慈相、修习慈心、观察业属于自己的、多作如理思择、亲近善知识、说适当的话。因为,一个人无论是以限定对象、不限定对象或遍满各方的方式取慈相,嗔恨都会断除;以限定遍满或不限定遍满的方式修习慈心,嗔恨也会断除。有人这样观察自己和他人“业属于自己的”:你对他生气,能怎样呢?你能毁掉他的戒等功德吗?你难道不是随自己的业而来,也会随自己的业而去吗?对别人生气,就像拿着燃烧的火炭、灼热的铁矛或粪便之类的东西,想去打别人一样。他生你的气,又能怎样呢?他能毁掉你的戒等功德吗?他也是随自己的业而来,随自己的业而去。这嗔恨就像没被接受的赠礼,或者逆风撒出去的尘土,只会落回他自己头上。对于像这样观察自己和他人的“业属于自己的”,又观察双方的业都属于自己的道理,安住在如理思择中的人,嗔恨也会断除。亲近像马护长老那样乐于修慈的善知识的人,嗔恨也会断除。在站立、坐下等时候,以与慈相应的话来说适当的话,嗔恨也会断除。因此说:“有六种法能帮助断除嗔恨。”对于通过这六种法已经断除嗔恨的人,他能了知:未来以不来道不会再令其生起。
Apica cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattanti mettānimittassa uggaho mettābhāvanānuyogo kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā paṭisaṅkhānabahulatā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Odissakaanodissakadisāpharaṇānañhi aññataravasena mettaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati, odhisoanodhisopharaṇavasena mettaṃ bhāventassāpi. ‘‘Tvaṃ etassa kuddho kiṃ karissasi, kimassa sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissasi, nanu tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attano kammeneva gamissasi, parassa kujjhanaṃ nāma vītaccitaṅgāra tattaaya salākagūthādīni gahetvā paraṃ paharitukāmatāsadisaṃ hoti. Esopi tava kuddho kiṃ karissati, kiṃ te sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissati, esa attano kammena āgantvā attano kammeneva gamissati, appaṭicchitapaheṇakaṃ viya paṭivātaṃ khittarajomuṭṭhi viya ca etassevesa kodho matthake patissatī’’ti evaṃ attano ca parassa ca kammassakataṃ paccavekkhatopi, ubhayakammassakataṃ paccavekkhitvā paṭisaṅkhāne ṭhitassāpi, assaguttattherasadise mettābhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu mettānissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa byāpādassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
在不乐等状态中,由于不如理作意,昏沉睡眠就会生起。所谓“疲倦”,就是身体的懈怠。所谓“伸展身体”,就是身体的弯曲。所谓“食后昏沉”,就是吃饭后的昏昧、吃饭后的燥热。所谓“心的萎靡”,就是心呈现萎靡的状态。对于这些不乐等状态,如果频繁地让不如理作意运作,昏沉睡眠就会生起。因此说:“诸比丘,有不乐、疲倦、伸展身体、食后昏沉、心的萎靡,在那里,如果反复做不如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的昏沉睡眠得以生起、让已经生起的昏沉睡眠变得更多、更广大的食物。”
Aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikārena thinamiddhassa uppādo hoti. Tandī nāma kāyālasiyatā. Vijambhitā nāma kāyavinamanā. Bhattasammado nāma bhattamucchā bhattapariḷāho. Cetaso līnattaṃ nāma cittassa līnākāro. Imesu aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, arati tandī vijambhitā bhattasammado cetaso līnattaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
不过,在发动界等这些情况下,如理作意就能断除昏沉睡眠。所谓发动界,就是最初发起的精进;所谓出离界,因为是从懈怠中出离,所以比前者更强;所谓胜进界,因为一步步向前推进,所以又比前者更强。对于这三种精进,如果频繁地修习如理作意,昏沉睡眠就会被断除。因此说:诸比丘,有发动界、出离界、胜进界,在那里多修习如理作意,这就是尚未生起的昏沉睡眠不生的食,也是已经生起的昏沉睡眠被断除的食。
Ārambhadhātuādīsu pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Ārambhadhātu nāma paṭhamārambhavīriyaṃ. Nikkamadhātu nāma kosajjato nikkhantatāya tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātu nāma paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Imasmiṃ tippabhede vīriye yonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa anuppādāya, uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除昏沉睡眠:吃东西过量时能警觉到过患、变换姿势、作意光明想、住在露天处、亲近善知识、说有益的话。像“手抓食者”“随落处食者”“吃到衣服滑落者”“乌鸦食者”“吃到呕吐者”那样吃完之后,坐在夜间住处或白天住处修沙门法时,昏沉睡眠就会像大公象一样压过来;但如果留出四五口饭的余地,喝点水,只求维持身体,这样的比丘就不会有昏沉睡眠。像这样,在吃东西过量时能警觉到过患,昏沉睡眠也能断除。如果在某种姿势中昏沉睡眠出现了,就换到另一种姿势;晚上作意月光、灯光、火把的光,白天作意日光;住在露天处;亲近像大迦叶尊者那样已经断除昏沉睡眠的善知识;在站立、坐下等时候,说与头陀支相应的有益的话,昏沉睡眠也能断除。因此说:“有六种法能帮助断除昏沉睡眠。”他以这六种法断除昏沉睡眠后,清楚地知道:依靠阿拉汉道,将来不会再产生。
Apica cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – atibhojane nimittaggāho, iriyāpathasamparivattanatā, ālokasaññāmanasikāro, abbhokāsavāso, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Āharahatthaka tatravaṭṭaka alaṃsāṭaka kākamāsaka bhuttavamitakabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhāne nisinnassa hi samaṇadhammaṃ karoto thinamiddhaṃ mahāhatthī viya ottharantaṃ āgacchati, catupañcaālopaokāsaṃ pana ṭhapetvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlassa bhikkhuno taṃ na hotīti evaṃ atibhojane nimittaṃ gaṇhantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Yasmiṃ iriyāpathe thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, tato aññaṃ parivattentassāpi, rattiṃ candālokadīpālokaukkāloke divā sūriyālokaṃ manasikarontassāpi, abbhokāse vasantassāpi, mahākassapattherasadise pahīnathinamiddhe kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa thinamiddhassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
心不寂静时,因为不如理作意,掉举和追悔就会生起。所谓不寂静,就是指不寂静的状态,从含义上说,它其实就是掉举和追悔本身。在这里,如果反复不断地让不如理作意现前,掉举和追悔就会生起。因此经中说:“比丘们,有心不寂静,在那里反复修习不如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的掉举和追悔得以生起、让已经生起的掉举和追悔进一步增长广大的食物。”
Cetaso avūpasame ayonisomanasikārena uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādo hoti. Avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro, uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato uddhaccakukkuccaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso avūpasamo, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti.
而在被称为“定”的心寂静状态中,他通过如理作意断除了它。因此说:“比丘们,存在心的寂静,在那里反复修习如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的掉举后悔不产生的食,也是让已经生起的掉举后悔被断除的食。”
Samādhisaṅkhāte pana cetaso vūpasame yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso vūpasamo, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa anuppādāya, uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāyā’’ti.
另外,有六种法能帮助断除掉举和悔恨:多闻、好问、精通律、亲近长老、亲近善知识、说适当的话。因为,即使一个人按照巴利文和义理,学习一部、两部、三部、四部或五部尼柯耶,他的掉举和悔恨也会被断除。经常问什么是允许的、什么是不允许的,也能断除;在律的制定上达到熟练自在而精通律,也能断除;去拜访年长的大长老,也能断除;亲近像优波离长老那样持律的善知识,也能断除;在站立、坐下等时候,谈论与允许和不允许相关的适当话题,也能断除。因此说:“有六种法能帮助断除掉举和悔恨。”当这六种法断除了掉举和悔恨之后,他了知:掉举在未来由阿拉汉道断尽,悔恨在未来由不来者道断尽,不再生起。
Apica cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti bahussutatā paripucchakatā vinaye pakataññutā vuddhasevitā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Bāhussaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati. Kappiyākappiyaparipucchābahulassāpi, vinayapaññattiyaṃ ciṇṇavasibhāvatāya pakataññunopi, vuḍḍhe mahallakatthere upasaṅkamantassāpi, upālittherasadise vinayadhare kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati, ṭhānanisajjādīsu kappiyākappiyanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīne uddhaccakukkucce uddhaccassa arahattamaggena , kukkuccassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
对于能引生疑的法,由于不如理作意,疑就生起。所谓“能引生疑的法”,就是那些一再成为疑之因的法,它们本身就是疑。在这些法上反复修习不如理作意,疑就会生起。因此说:“比丘们,有能引生疑的法,在这些法上反复修习不如理作意,这就是让未生起的疑生起的食,也是让已生起的疑增长广大的食。”
Vicikicchāṭhānīyesu dhammesu ayonisomanasikārena vicikicchāya uppādo hoti. Vicikicchāṭhānīyā dhammā nāma punappunaṃ vicikicchāya kāraṇattā vicikicchāva. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato vicikicchā uppajjati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, vicikicchāṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya uppādāya, uppannāya vā vicikicchāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
对于善与不善等法,通过如理作意,疑就被断除了。因此说:“比丘们,有善与不善法,有罪与无罪法,应修习与不应修习法,低劣与殊胜法,黑白相对法。在这些法当中,反复修习如理作意,这就是食:它令尚未生起的疑不生起,也令已生起的疑得以断除。”
Kusalādidhammesu yonisomanasikārena panassā pahānaṃ hoti, tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā sāvajjānavajjā dhammā sevitabbāsevitabbā dhammā hīnapaṇītā dhammā kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro, anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya anuppādāya; uppannāya vā vicikicchāya pahānāyā’’ti.
另外,有六种法能帮助断除疑:多闻、勤于提问、精通律、有坚定的胜解、亲近善知识、说适宜的话。因为,即使一个人只是按照经文和义理来学习一部乃至五部经藏,他的疑也会被断除;经常针对三宝提问的人,疑也会被断除;在律上修行纯熟、运用自如的人,疑也会被断除;对三宝怀有坚定净信、也就是具有很强胜解的人,疑也会被断除;亲近像瓦咖离尊者那样以信胜解为特长的善知识的人,疑也会被断除;在站立、坐下等各种威仪中,谈论三宝功德的适宜话题,疑也会被断除。因此说:“有六种法能帮助断除疑。”他以这六种法断除疑之后,便知道:由入流道所断除的疑,未来不会再产生。
Apica cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattanti bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, adhimokkhabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Bāhussaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā…pe… pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati, tīṇi ratanāni ārabbha paripucchābahulassāpi, vinaye ciṇṇavasībhāvassāpi, tīsu ratanesu okappaniyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāpi, saddhādhimutte vakkalittherasadise kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati, ṭhānanisajjādīsu tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnāya vicikicchāya sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
“或于内”这句是说:像这样通过把握五盖,他或在自己的诸法上、或在他人的诸法上,或有时在自己的诸法上、或有时在他人的诸法上,随观诸法而安住。这里所说的集起与灭去,应当依照在净相、不净相等上面起不如理作意与如理作意的方式,从五盖部分已经讲过的内容中引出来。从这里往后,都和前面所说的一样。这里唯一不同的是:把把握五盖的念当作苦谛,这样联系起来之后,就应当了知这位把握五盖的比丘的出离之门。其余内容完全相同。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ pañcanīvaraṇapariggaṇhanena attano vā dhammesu, parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha subhanimittaasubhanimittādīsu ayonisomanasikārayonisomanasikāravasena pañcasu nīvaraṇesu vuttāyeva nīharitabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha nīvaraṇapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā nīvaraṇapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
蕴分别注释
Khandhapabbavaṇṇanā
383383. 这样,按五盖分析了法随观之后,现在为了按五取蕴来分析,又说了“复次……”等话。其中,“在五取蕴中”的意思是:取之蕴就是取蕴,也就是作为取的缘的法聚、法堆。这是这里的简要说明。至于详细的蕴的讨论,在《清净道论》中已经说过。
383. Evaṃ pañcanīvaraṇavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni pañcakkhandhavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha pañcasu upādānakkhandhesūti upādānassa khandhā upādānakkhandhā, upādānassa paccayabhūtā dhammapuñjā dhammarāsayoti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana khandhakathā visuddhimagge vuttā.
“这是色”,意思是:这就是色,只有这么多是色,除此之外没有别的色——他这样以色的自性了知色。对受等其余诸蕴,方法也一样。这里是简略的说明;详细的色等解释,在《清净道论》的“蕴解说”中已经讲过。“这是色的集起”,意思是:像这样,以无明集起等五种方式,了知色的集起。“这是色的灭去”,意思是:像这样,以无明灭等五种方式,了知色的灭去。对受等其余诸蕴,方法也一样。这里是简略的说明,详细内容在《清净道论》的“生灭智解说”中已经讲过。
Iti rūpanti idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito paraṃ rūpaṃ atthīti sabhāvato rūpaṃ pajānāti. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārena pana rūpādīni visuddhimagge khandhakathāyameva vuttāni. Iti rūpassa samudayoti evaṃ avijjāsamudayādivasena pañcahākārehi rūpassa samudayo. Iti rūpassa atthaṅgamoti evaṃ avijjānirodhādivasena pañcahākārehi rūpassa atthaṅgamo. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge udayabbayañāṇakathāya vutto.
“或于内”这句话的意思是:像这样通过把握五蕴,他或者在自己的诸法上,或者在他人的诸法上,或者有时在自己的诸法上、有时在他人的诸法上,作为法随观者而安住。不过,这里集与灭的随观,应当依据五蕴部分中所说的“无明集则色集”等五十种相来引发。此后所说的方法都和前面一样。只是在这里,把把握蕴的念与“这是苦谛”这样结合起来之后,应当知道,对那位正在把握蕴的比丘来说,这就是出离之门。其余内容与此相同。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ pañcakkhandhapariggaṇhanena attano vā dhammesu, parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādīnaṃ pañcasu khandhesu vuttānaṃ paññāsāya lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena nīharitabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha khandhapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā khandhapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
处品的注释
Āyatanapabbavaṇṇanā
384384. 这样,按五蕴把法随观分别讲完之后,现在为了按处来分别,又说了“再者,诸比丘……”等话。其中,“于内外六处”是指:眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意这六个内处,以及色、声、香、味、触、法这六个外处。“他了知眼”,是他以如实的自相了知眼净色。“他了知诸色”,是他以如实的自相了知外在由四种因所生的色。“以及他了知依此二者而生起的结”,是指他了知依眼与色这两者、缘此二者而生起的十种结,即欲贪结、嗔结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉妒结、悭吝结、无明结,并且他也以如实的自相了知这些结。
384. Evaṃ pañcakkhandhavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni āyatanavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesūti cakkhu sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhā kāyo manoti imesu chasu ajjhattikesu, rūpaṃ saddo gandho raso phoṭṭhabbo dhammoti imesu chasu bāhiresu. Cakkhuñca pajānātīti cakkhupasādaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti. Rūpe ca pajānātīti bahiddhā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti. Yañca tadubhayaṃ paṭicca uppajjati saṃyojananti yañca taṃ cakkhuṃ ceva rūpe cāti ubhayaṃ paṭicca. Kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭigha, māna, diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāsa, bhavarāga, issā, macchariya, avijjāsaṃyojananti dasavidhaṃ saṃyojanaṃ uppajjati, tañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti.
那么,这些结又是怎么生起的呢?先说在眼门:当一个可爱的所缘出现在眼前,以享受欲乐的心态去品味它、欢喜它,欲贪结就生起了。面对不可爱的所缘,心生愤怒,嗔结就生起了。心里想“除了我,还有谁能把这个所缘看得这么清楚”,带着这样的慢心,慢结就生起了。把这个色所缘执为常、执为恒常不变,见结就生起了。心里犹豫“这个色所缘是有情,还是属于有情的”,因为这样的疑惑,疑结就生起了。心里盼着“愿我们在来世的圆满生命中也能轻易得到这样的所缘”,因为渴求来世的存在,有贪结就生起了。心里想“将来只要受持这样的戒禁,也能得到它”,于是去受持戒禁,戒禁取结就生起了。心里嫉妒地想“但愿别人得不到那个色所缘”,嫉妒结就生起了。对自己得到的色所缘悭吝不舍、不愿与人分享,悭吝结就生起了。而所有这些结,都因为与它们同时生起的无知,所以无明结就生起了。
Kathaṃ panetaṃ uppajjatīti? Cakkhudvāre tāva āpāthagataṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ kāmassādavasena assādayato abhinandato kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Aniṭṭhārammaṇe kujjhato paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā maṃ ko añño etaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ samattho atthī’’ti maññato mānasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ niccaṃ dhuvanti gaṇhato diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ satto nu kho, sattassa nu kho’’ti vicikicchato vicikicchāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Sampattibhave vata no idaṃ sulabhaṃ jāta’’nti bhavaṃ patthentassa bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Āyatimpi evarūpaṃ sīlabbataṃ samādiyitvā sakkā laddhu’’nti sīlabbataṃ samādiyantassa sīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Aho vata taṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ aññe na labheyyu’’nti usūyato issāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Attanā laddhaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ aññassa maccharāyato macchariyasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Sabbeheva sahajātaaññāṇavasena avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati.
他是怎么知道“未生起”的?他清楚地知道,由于什么原因,那十种结虽然还没有以现行活动的方式生起,却会因此生起。他是怎么知道“已生起”的?他清楚地知道,由于什么原因,那十种结——或者因为还没有被断除,或者因为正在现行活动——已经生起,并会因此而被断除。他是怎么知道“已断除”的?他清楚地知道,由于什么原因,那十种结虽然已经通过彼分断和镇伏断而被断除,但将来不会再重新生起。那么,由于什么原因,它们将来不会再重新生起呢?首先,见、疑、戒禁取、嫉妒、悭吝这五种结,通过入流道而将来不再生起。粗重的欲贪和嗔这两种结,通过一来道而不再生起;微细的欲贪和嗔,通过不来道而不再生起;慢、有贪、无明这三种结,通过阿拉汉道而将来不再生起。“他了知耳与声”等说法,也应当按同样的方式理解。另外,这里关于处的详细解说,应当依照《清净道论》中“处分别”部分所讲的方式来理解。
Yathā ca anuppannassāti yena kāraṇena asamudācāravasena anuppannassa tassa dasavidhassāpi saṃyojanassa uppādo hoti, tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Yathā ca uppannassāti appahīnaṭṭhena pana samudācāravasena vā uppannassa tassa dasavidhassāpi saṃyojanassa yena kāraṇena pahānaṃ hoti, tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Yathā ca pahīnassāti tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānavasena pahīnassāpi tassa dasavidhassa saṃyojanassa yena kāraṇena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti, tañca pajānāti. Kena kāraṇena panassa āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti? Diṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsaissāmacchariyabhedassa tāva pañcavidhassa saṃyojanassa sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti. Kāmarāgapaṭighasaṃyojanadvayassa oḷārikassa sakadāgāmimaggena, aṇusahagatassa anāgāmimaggena, mānabhavarāgāvijjāsaṃyojanattayassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti. Sotañca pajānāti sadde cātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Apicettha āyatanakathā vitthārato visuddhimagge āyatananiddese vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
或于内是这样:他通过把握内处,在自己的诸法上,或通过把握外处,在他人的诸法上,或者有时在自己的诸法上、有时在他人的诸法上,随观诸法而安住。
在这里,集和灭应当依照“以无明集而有眼集”这样的方式推知:色处的集灭归于色蕴,无色处中意处的集灭归于识蕴,法处的集灭归于其余诸蕴,都按前面所说的方式推导。不应执取出世间法。从这里往后,都和前面所说的一样。
只是在这里要这样理解:把把握处之念与苦谛结合起来之后,对于把握处的比丘来说,这就是出离的门径。其余的内容也都与此相同。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ ajjhattikāyatanapariggaṇhanena attano vā dhammesu bāhirāyatanapariggaṇhanena parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha ‘‘avijjāsamudayā cakkhusamudayo’’ti rūpāyatanassa rūpakkhandhe, arūpāyatanesu manāyatanassa viññāṇakkhandhe, dhammāyatanassa sesakkhandhesu vuttanayena nīharitabbā. Lokuttaradhammā na gahetabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha āyatanapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā āyatanapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
觉支品注释
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
385385. 像这样,按六内处和六外处分别讲完法随观之后,现在要按觉支来分别,所以又说“再者,诸比丘……”等。其中,“于诸觉支”是指在能觉者的支分中。“存在”是指通过获得而现前存在。“念觉支”是指被称为念的觉支。在这里,从开始修观之时起,瑜伽行者就在正觉,所以叫正觉。或者,他依靠念等七法的和合而从烦恼的睡眠中觉醒、起来,或者通达诸谛,这种法的和合就是正觉。属于那个正觉的支分,或者属于那种正觉的支分,所以叫觉支。因此说“被称为念的觉支”。其余诸觉支也应当按这个方式来理解词义。
385. Evaṃ cha ajjhattikabāhirāyatanavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni bojjhaṅgavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha bojjhaṅgesūti bujjhanakasattassa aṅgesu. Santanti paṭilābhavasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Satisambojjhaṅganti satisaṅkhātaṃ sambojjhaṅgaṃ. Ettha hi sambujjhati āraddhavipassakato paṭṭhāya yogāvacaroti sambodhi. Yāya vā so satiādikāya sattadhammasāmaggiyā sambujjhati kilesaniddāto uṭṭhāti, saccāni vā paṭivijjhati, sā dhammasāmaggī sambodhi. Tassa sambodhissa, tassā vā sambodhiyā aṅganti sambojjhaṅgaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘satisaṅkhātaṃ sambojjhaṅga’’nti. Sesasambojjhaṅgesupi imināva nayena vacanattho veditabbo.
“不存在”是指由于没有得到所以不存在。至于像“未生起的……”这类经文里,对念觉支是这样说的:“诸比丘,有作为念觉支生起基础的法,在那里反复如理作意,这就是食,能促使未生起的念觉支生起,或者促使已生起的念觉支增长、扩大、修习、圆满。”念觉支就是这样生起的。其中,作为念觉支生起基础的,就是念本身;如理作意,就是前面说过的那个特征。对那些法反复不断地如理作意,念觉支就会生起。
Asantanti appaṭilābhavasena avijjamānaṃ. Yathā ca anupannassātiādīsu pana satisambojjhaṅgassa tāva ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha satiyeva satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇoyeva. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
另外,有四种法能帮助念觉支生起:正念正知、避开失念的人、亲近具念的人、心倾向于念。具体来说,在前进、后退等七种情况下保持正念正知;避开像把饭丢给乌鸦那样失念的人;亲近像帝萨达多长老、无畏长老那样具念的人;在站立、坐下等姿势中,为了让念现前,把心倾向、朝向、专注于念。这样,念觉支就依四种因缘生起。他清楚地知道:这样依四种因缘生起之后,这个念觉支通过阿拉汉道达到修习圆满。
Apica cattāro dhammā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti satisampajaññaṃ muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanatā upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Abhikkantādīsu hi sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññena, bhattanikkhittakākasadise muṭṭhassatipuggale parivajjanena, tissadattattheraabhayattherasadise upaṭṭhitassatipuggale sevanena, ṭhānanisajjādīsu satisamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatāya ca satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
择法觉支的生起是这样的:“比丘们,有善与不善的法……乃至……有黑白相对的法,在那里,如理作意反复多修,这就是食,能令尚未生起的择法觉支生起,也能令已经生起的择法觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满。”
Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pana ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā…pe… kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有七种法能帮助择法觉支生起:喜欢多问、让事清净、使诸根平衡、远离愚钝的人、亲近有智慧的人、反复观察甚深智慧的行境、内心倾向于择法。
其中,喜欢多问是指:对蕴、界、处、根、力、觉支、道支、禅那支、止、观这些法义,喜欢反复地提问、追问。
让事清净是指:让内在的事和外在的事都变得清净。
当一个人的头发、指甲、体毛太长,或者身体里积累了过多的病素,被汗垢污染时,这时内在的事就不清净、不干净。当衣服破旧、肮脏、发臭,或者住处杂乱不洁时,这时外在的事就不清净、不干净。
所以,应该通过剪头发、指甲等,通过上泻药、下泻药等让身体变得轻快,通过涂油、沐浴等,让内在的事清净。应该通过缝补、洗涤、染色、整理用具等,让外在的事清净。
因为当内在和外在的事都不清净时,生起的心和心所中的智慧也不清净、不明亮,就像依靠不干净的灯盏、灯芯和油而生起的灯光一样暗淡。而当内在和外在的事都清净时,生起的心和心所中的智慧也清净、明亮,就像依靠干净的灯盏、灯芯和油而生起的灯光一样明亮。
因此说:“让事清净,能帮助择法觉支生起。”
Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paripucchakatā vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā paññavantapuggalasevanā gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha paripucchakatāti khandhadhātuāyatanaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānaṅgasamathavipassanānaṃ atthasannissitaparipucchābahulatā. Vatthuvisadakiriyāti ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomāni dīghāni honti, sarīraṃ vā ussannadosañceva sedamalamakkhitañca, tadā ajjhattikaṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Yadā pana cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ, tadā bāhiravatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Tasmā kesādichedāpanena uddhaṃvirecanaadhovirecanādīhi sarīrasallahukabhāvakaraṇena ucchādananahāpanena ca ajjhattikavatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sūcikammadhovanarajanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇādīhi bāhiravatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Etasmiñhi ajjhattikabāhire vatthumhi avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ aparisuddhāni dīpakapallavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhire vatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti parisuddhāni dīpakapallavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuvisadakiriyā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattatī’’ti.
所谓“使诸根均等”,就是让信等诸根达到平衡。因为如果他的信根强,其他诸根弱,那么精进根就没办法发挥策励的作用,念根没办法发挥现前的作用,定根没办法发挥不散乱的作用,慧根没办法发挥照见的作用。所以,应当通过省察诸法的自性来减弱它,或者对那因如理作意而变强的一根,以不如理作意来减弱它。瓦咖离长老的故事在这里可以作为例证。如果精进根过强,那么信根就没办法发挥胜解的作用,其他诸根也没办法各自发挥各自的作用。所以,应当通过修习轻安等来减弱它。关于这一点,可以举索纳长老的故事为例。同样地,对于其余诸根,当某一根过强时,应当知道其余诸根便无力胜任各自的作用。
Indriyasamattapaṭipādanā nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni, tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā, yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ. Tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattherassa vatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā.
在这里,特别要赞叹信与慧的平衡,以及定与精进的平衡。因为信强而慧弱的人,会变成盲目轻信,对不该信的对象也生起净信。慧强而信弱的人,则会落入狡诈那一类,就像由药物引发的疾病一样,难以治愈。他如果一味认为“只要生起善心就已经是善了”,因而过度冒进,不去做布施等善行,就会堕入地狱。只有两者平衡时,他才会只对真正值得信的对象生起净信。再者,定强而精进弱时,由于定属于懈怠那一方,懈怠就会压倒他。精进强而定弱时,由于精进属于掉举那一方,掉举就会压倒他。然而,当定与精进结合在一起时,定就不会陷入懈怠;当精进与定结合在一起时,精进就不会陷入掉举。因此,应当使这两者保持平衡。因为只有两者平衡,才能达到安止。
Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño mudhappasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati, bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti. Cittuppādamatteneva kusalaṃ hotīti atidhāvitvā dānādīni akaronto niraye uppajjati. Ubhinnaṃ samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati. Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā kosajjaṃ abhibhavati. Balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃ vīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā uddhaccaṃ abhibhavati. Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati, vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti.
另外,对修定的人来说,即使信很强,也是合适的。这样相信、认可,他就会达到安止。不过在定和慧当中,对修定的人来说,一境性强是合适的,这样他才能达到安止。对修观的人来说,慧强是合适的,这样他才能通达诸相。而这两者平衡时,也能达到安止。但念在任何情况下都应当是强有力的。因为念能保护心,不让它因为信、精进、慧这些偏向掉举的法而堕入掉举,也不让它因为偏向懈怠的定而堕入懈怠。所以,念就像一切菜肴里的盐,又像处理国王一切事务的大臣,在一切事上都不可缺少。因此世尊说:“念在一切处都是必需的。”为什么呢?因为心以念为依靠,念的作用就是守护,离开念,心的策励和抑制就不可能。所谓“回避劣慧之人”,就是远远避开那些对蕴等法的差别没有深入智慧、愚笨少慧的人。所谓“亲近有慧之人”,就是亲近那些具备能把握五十相的生灭慧的人。所谓“观察甚深智行”,就是对在甚深的蕴等法上运作的甚深智慧,进行分别观察。所谓“倾向于彼”,就是在站、坐等一切姿势中,为了让择法觉支生起,让心倾向于彼、斜向于彼、朝向于彼。这样,他就能了知:已经生起的慧,通过阿拉汉道的修习而达到圆满。
Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati. Samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāyapi appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato, kosajjapakkhikena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati. Tasmā sā loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu, sabbakammikaamacco viya ca, sabbarājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘sati ca pana sabbatthikā vuttā bhagavatā, kiṃ kāraṇā? Cittañhi satipaṭisaraṇaṃ, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā ca sati, na vinā satiyā cittassa paggahaniggaho hotī’’ ti. Duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā nāma khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānaṃ dummedhapuggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Paññavantapuggalasevanā nāma samapaññāsalakkhaṇapariggāhikāya udayabbayapaññāya samannāgatapuggalasevanā. Gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā nāma gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evaṃ uppannassa pannassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
关于精进觉支,它的生起是这样的:比丘们,有发勤界、出离界、勇猛界,在那里反复如理作意,这就是食物,能促使尚未生起的精进觉支生起,或者促使已经生起的精进觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满。
Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有十一种法能帮助精进觉支生起:省察恶趣的恐怖、看到修行的利益、省察所行之道、恭敬对待钵食、省察传承的伟大、省察导师的伟大、省察出身的伟大、省察同梵行者的伟大、远离懈怠的人、亲近已发起精进的人,以及一心倾向于精进。
Apica ekādasa dhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇatā ānisaṃsadassāvitā gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā piṇḍapātāpacāyanatā dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇatā jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti.
在这里,从地狱众生遭受五种捆绑刑罚开始,即使是在承受极大痛苦的时候;在畜生道,即使是被网、套索、陷阱等捕获的时候;在被鞭打、荆棘刺伤而被迫拉车等的时候;在饿鬼界,即使历经数千年乃至整整一佛间隔那么长的时间,被饥渴折磨的时候;在黑绳阿修罗中,即使是以仅剩皮骨、身高六十肘或八十肘的身体,承受风、热等痛苦的时候——都无法生起精进觉支。比丘,现在正是你应当精进的时候!这样观察恶趣恐怖的人,精进觉支也会生起。
Tattha nirayesu pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāya mahādukkhānubhavanakālepi, tiracchānayoniyaṃ jālakhipanakumīnādīhi gahitakālepi, pājanakaṇṭakādippahāratunnassa sakaṭavahanādikālepi, pettivisaye anekānipi vassasahassāni ekaṃ buddhantarampi khuppipāsāhi āturībhūtakālepi, kālakañcikaasuresu saṭṭhihatthaasītihatthappamāṇena aṭṭhicammamatteneva attabhāvena vātātapādidukkhānubhavanakālepi na sakkā vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṃ uppādetuṃ, ayameva te bhikkhu kālo vīriyakaraṇāyāti evaṃ apāyabhayaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi vīriyasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
懈怠的人不可能证得九种出世间法,只有真正发起精进的人才能证得——这就是精进带来的利益。像这样看清精进利益的人,精进觉支也会生起。诸佛、独觉佛、大弟子们走过的路,是必须走的,而懈怠的人根本走不了。像这样反复观察这条必行之道的人,精进觉支也会生起。那些用团食等东西来供养你的人,他们既不是你的亲戚,也不是你的奴仆或佣人,他们也不是想着“我们要靠他过日子”才把上好的袈裟等物品送给你。他们其实是希望自己所做的供养能带来大果报,所以才布施。世尊也不是因为看到“这位比丘受用这些资具后,身体会强壮、舒服地过日子”才允许你受用这些资具;而是因为看到“他受用这些之后,会去修沙门法,从而从轮回的苦里解脱出来”,才允许他受用。现在你要是懈怠地过日子,就不会敬重那团食。因为只有真正发起精进的人,才称得上是在恭敬受用团食。像这样反复观察恭敬受用团食这件事的人,精进觉支也会生起,就像阿夷蜜多长老那样。
Na sakkā kusītena navalokuttaradhammaṃ laddhuṃ, āraddhavīriyeneva sakkā ayamānisaṃso vīriyassāti evaṃ ānisaṃsadassāvinopi uppajjati. Sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakehi te gatamaggo gantabbo, so ca na sakkā kusītena gantunti evaṃ gamanavīthiṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati. Ye taṃ piṇḍapātādīhi upaṭṭhahanti, ime te manussā neva ñātakā, na dāsakammakarā, nāpi taṃ nissāya jīvissāmāti te paṇītāni cīvarādīni denti. Atha kho attano kārānaṃ mahapphalataṃ paccāsīsamānā denti. Satthārāpi ‘‘ayaṃ ime paccaye paribhuñjitvā kāyadaḷhībahulo sukhaṃ viharissatī’’ti na evaṃ sampassatā tuyhaṃ paccayā anuññātā. Atha kho ‘‘ayaṃ ime paribhuñjamāno samaṇadhammaṃ katvā vaṭṭadukkhato muccissatī’’ti te paccayā anuññātā, so dāni tvaṃ kusīto viharanto na taṃ piṇḍaṃ apacāyissati. Āraddhavīriyasseva hi piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ nāma hotīti evaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati ayyamittattherassa viya.
据说,长老住在农夫窟。在他托钵的村子里,有一位大近事女把长老当作儿子一样照顾。有一天,大近事女要去森林时,对女儿说:“女儿啊,陈米放在某个地方,酥油在某个地方,牛奶在某个地方,糖浆在某个地方。等你哥哥阿夷蜜多来的时候,你煮好饭,配上牛奶、酥油和糖浆一起给他,你自己也吃一些。我昨天已经把昨天煮的隔夜饭拌着酸粥吃过了。”女儿问:“妈妈,那你白天吃什么?”母亲说:“女儿,你放些菜叶,用碎米给我煮点酸粥留着就行。”
Thero kira kassakaleṇe nāma paṭivasati. Tassa ca gocaragāme ekā mahāupāsikā theraṃ puttaṃ katvā paṭijaggati. Sā ekadivasaṃ araññaṃ gacchantī dhītaraṃ āha – ‘‘amma, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne purāṇataṇḍulā, asukasmiṃ sappi, asukasmiṃ khīraṃ, asukasmiṃ phāṇitaṃ, tava bhātikassa ayyamittassa āgatakāle bhattaṃ pacitvā khīrasappiphāṇitehi saddhiṃ dehi, tvañca bhuñjeyyāsi. Ahaṃ pana hiyyo pakkapārivāsikabhattaṃ kañjiyena bhuttāmhī’’ti. Divā kiṃ bhuñjissasi ammā,ti? Sākapaṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā kaṇataṇḍulehi ambilayāguṃ pacitvā ṭhapehi ammā,ti.
长老披上袈裟,正要取出钵时,听到那个声音,就告诫自己:“听说这位大近事女自己用酸粥配着残饭吃过,白天还要吃碎米菜叶酸粥,可是她却为了你,把陈米等东西一一交代出来。她并不是靠着你才指望得到田地、房舍、饭食、衣服;她是想求得三种成就才做布施的。你能给她这三种成就吗?你给不了。而且,这团钵食,你带着贪、带着嗔、带着痴,是不能接受的。”于是他把钵放进钵袋,解开绳结,转身回到农夫窟,把钵放在床下,把袈裟挂在袈裟架上,下定决心:“不证得阿拉汉果,我就不出这里!”然后坐下用功。这位长久以来不懈怠的比丘,修习观禅,在午前就证得了阿拉汉果,像盛开的莲花一样,这位大漏尽者微笑着坐下。住在窟门树上的天神……
Thero cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ nīharantova taṃ saddaṃ sutvā attānaṃ ovadi ‘‘mahāupāsikā kira kañjiyena pārivāsikabhattaṃ bhuñji, divāpi kaṇapaṇṇambilayāguṃ bhuñjissati , tuyhaṃ atthāya pana purāṇataṇḍulādīni ācikkhati, taṃ nissāya kho panesā neva khettaṃ na vatthuṃ na bhattaṃ na vatthaṃ paccāsīsati, tisso pana sampattiyo patthayamānā deti, tvaṃ etissā tā sampattiyo dātuṃ sakkhissasi, na sakkhissasīti, ayaṃ kho pana piṇḍapāto tayā sarāgena sadosena samohena na sakkā gaṇhitu’’nti pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā gaṇṭhikaṃ muñcitvā nivattitvā kassakaleṇameva gantvā pattaṃ heṭṭhāmañce cīvaraṃ cīvaravaṃse ṭhapetvā ‘‘arahattaṃ apāpuṇitvā na nikkhamissāmī’’ti vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā nisīdi. Dīgharattaṃ appamatto hutvā nivutthabhikkhu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā purebhattameva arahattaṃ patvā vikasamānamiva padumaṃ mahākhīṇāsavo sitaṃ karontova nisīdi. Leṇadvāre rukkhamhi adhivatthā devatā –
“礼敬您,人中良骏!礼敬您,人中无上者!
你的诸漏已尽,你是值得受人供养的人,朋友。”
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te āsavā khīṇā, dakkhiṇeyyosi mārisā’’ti. –
说完优陀那之后,她说道:“尊者,像您这样的阿拉汉们进村乞食,那些老妇人供养了食物之后,就能从苦中解脱!”长老起身,打开门,看了看时间,知道“还是清晨”,便拿起衣钵,进入了村庄。
Udānaṃ udānetvā ‘‘bhante, piṇḍāya paviṭṭhānaṃ tumhādisānaṃ arahantānaṃ bhikkhaṃ datvā mahallakitthiyo dukkhā muccissantī’’ti āha. Thero uṭṭhahitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā kālaṃ olokento ‘‘pātoyevā’’ti ñatvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṃ pāvisi.
少女把饭做好后,就坐在那里望着门口,心里想:“我哥哥现在就要来了,现在就要来了。”长老来到家门口时,她接过钵,盛满拌了酥油和糖浆的乳粥,放在他手里。长老念了祝福语“愿你安乐”,就离开了。她也一直站在那里望着他。那时候,长老的肤色极其清净,诸根明净,面容就像脱离了束缚的熟棕榈果一样,格外光彩照人。
Dārikāpi bhattaṃ sampādetvā ‘‘idāni me bhātā āgamissati, idāni āgamissatī’’ti dvāraṃ olokayamānā nisīdi. Sā there gharadvāraṃ sampatte pattaṃ gahetvā sappiphāṇitayojitassa khīrapiṇḍapātassa pūretvā hatthe ṭhapesi. Thero ‘‘sukhaṃ hotū’’ti anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sāpi taṃ olokayamānā aṭṭhāsi. Therassa hi tadā ativiya parisuddho chavivaṇṇo ahosi, vippasannāni indriyāni, mukhaṃ bandhanā pavuttatālapakkaṃ viya ativiya virocittha.
大近事女从阿兰若回来后,问道:“女儿,你哥哥来了吗?”少女就把整件事都告诉了她。近事女知道“今天我儿子的出家之事已经圆满了”,便说:“女儿,你哥哥在佛陀的教法中过得安乐,没有厌倦。”
Mahāupāsikā araññā āgantvā ‘‘kiṃ, amma, bhātiko te āgato’’ti pucchi. Sā sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Upāsikā ‘‘ajja mama puttassa pabbajitakiccaṃ matthakaṃ patta’’nti ñatvā ‘‘abhiramati te, amma, bhātā buddhasāsane, na ukkaṇṭhatī’’ti āha.
这位导师留下的遗产实在伟大,也就是所谓的七种圣财,懈怠的人不可能得到它。就像父母对行为不端的儿子会认为“这不是我们的儿子”,把他排斥在外,儿子在父母去世后得不到遗产;同样,懈怠的人也得不到这份圣财遗产,只有真正精勤努力的人才能得到。当比丘这样反复思量这份遗产的伟大时,精进心就会生起。
Mahantaṃ kho panetaṃ satthudāyajjaṃ yadidaṃ satta ariyadhanāni nāma, taṃ na sakkā kusītena gahetuṃ. Yathā hi vippaṭipannaṃ puttaṃ mātāpitaro ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ aputto’’ti paribāhiraṃ karonti, so tesaṃ accayena dāyajjaṃ na labhati, evaṃ kusītopi idaṃ ariyadhanadāyajjaṃ na labhati, āraddhavīriyova labhatīti dāyajjamahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
你的导师确实非常伟大。当导师入母胎结生时、出家时、成正等觉时、转法轮时、示现双神变时、从天降下时、舍寿行时,乃至般涅槃时,一万个世界都震动了。你在这样一位伟大导师的教法中出家,却懈怠度日,这合理吗?这样省思导师的伟大,精进就会生起。
Mahā kho pana te satthā, satthuno hi te mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhigaṇhanakālepi abhinikkhamanepi abhisambodhiyampi dhammacakkappavattanayamakapāṭihāriyadevorohanaāyusaṅkhāravossajjanesupi parinibbānakālepi dasasahassilokadhātu akampittha, yuttaṃ nu te evarūpassa satthu sāsane pabbajitvā kusītena bhavitunti evaṃ satthumahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
从出身来看,你现在也不是出身低贱的人。你出生在从未中断、由大众推举的摩诃三摩多王传下来的甘蔗王族世系中,是苏托达那大王和摩诃摩耶的孙子,是罗睺罗贤者的弟弟。像你这样身为胜者之子,却懈怠度日,这实在不合适。这样省思出身的殊胜,精进就会生起。
Jātiyāpi tvaṃ idāni na lāmakajātiko, asambhinnāya mahāsammatapaveṇiyā āgataukkākarājavaṃse jātosi, suddhodanamahārājassa ca mahāmāyādeviyā ca nattā, rāhulabhaddassa kaniṭṭho, tayā nāma evarūpena jinaputtena hutvā na yuttaṃ kusītena viharitunti evaṃ jātimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
舍利弗、大目犍连以及八十位大弟子,都是靠精进证悟了出世间法。你正走在这些同梵行者的道路上,还是没有走在上面?像这样省思同梵行者的伟大,精进也会生起。
Sāriputtamahāmoggallānā ceva asīti ca mahāsāvakā vīriyeneva lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu, tvaṃ etesaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjasi, na paṭipajjasīti evaṃ sabrahmacārimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
对于像吃饱后瘫着不动的蟒蛇那样、身心精进都已松垮的懈怠者,即便你避开他们;对于已经发起精进、心志坚定的人,即便你亲近他们;在站立、坐下等种种姿势中,为了让精进生起,即便你的心已经倾向、朝向、偏向于精进——精进也会生起。而当精进这样生起之后,他清楚地知道:通过阿拉汉道,修习就达到圆满了。
Kucchiṃ pūretvā ṭhitaajagarasadise vissaṭṭhakāyikacetasikavīriye kusītapuggale parivajjantassāpi āraddhavīriye pahitatte puggale sevantassāpi ṭhānanisajjādīsu vīriyuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
喜觉支的生起是这样的:比丘们,有些法能作为喜觉支生起的基础,对这些法反复进行如理作意,这就是让还没生起的喜觉支得以生起、让已经生起的喜觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。这里说的“能作为喜觉支生起基础的法”,指的就是喜本身;而能让喜生起的作意,就叫如理作意。
Pītisambojjhaṅgassa ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti . Tattha pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma. Tassā uppādakamanasikāro yonisomanasikāro nāma.
另外,有十一种法能帮助喜觉支生起:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、寂止随念、远离粗劣的人、亲近柔和的人、省思能令人净信的经典,以及心倾向于这些。
随念佛陀功德的人,喜觉支会生起,遍满全身,直到近行定;随念法与僧的功德时,也是这样。长时间受持四种遍净戒,毫无缺损,省思此戒时,喜觉支也会生起;在家人省思自己所持的十戒或五戒时,也是这样。在饥荒等怖畏时,把美味食物布施给同梵行者后,省思“我们做了这样的布施”,喜觉支也会生起;在家人在这类时候,省思自己曾布施给持戒者,也是这样。随念自己具有那些让诸天神得以生为天人的功德时,喜觉支也会生起。省思因等至而镇伏的烦恼,六七十年间都不再现起时,喜觉支也会生起。见到佛塔、菩提树、长老时,如果行为不恭敬,就表明心性粗劣;对佛等缺乏净信与润泽,这样的人像驴背上的灰尘一样粗劣,应当远离。对佛等有浓厚净信、心性柔软润泽的人,应当亲近。省思阐明三宝功德、能令人净信的经典时,喜觉支也会生起。在站立、安坐等威仪中,为了让喜生起,把心倾向、朝向、偏斜于此时,喜觉支也会生起。
对于这样生起的喜觉支,他清楚地知道:它通过阿拉汉道而达到修习圆满。
Apica ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti buddhānussati, dhamma, saṅgha , sīla, cāga, devatānussati upasamānussati lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā siniddhapuggalasevanatā pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti. Buddhaguṇe anussarantassāpi hi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati, dhammasaṅghaguṇe anussarantassāpi, dīgharattaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā rakkhitaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihinopi dasasīlaṃ pañcasīlaṃ pañcavekkhantassāpi, dubbhikkhabhayādīsu paṇītabhojanaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvā ‘‘evaṃ nāma adamhā’’ti cāgaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihinopi evarūpe kāle sīlavantānaṃ dinnadānaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, yehi guṇehi samannāgatā devatā devattaṃ pattā, tathārūpānaṃ guṇānaṃ attani atthitaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, samāpattiyā vikkhambhitā kilesā saṭṭhipi sattatipi vassāni na samudācarantīti paccavekkhantassāpi, cetiyadassanabodhidassanatheradassanesu asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve buddhādīsu pasādasinehābhāvena gadrabhapiṭṭhe rajasadise lūkhapuggale parivajjantassāpi, buddhādīsu pasādabahule muducitte siniddhapuggale sevantassāpi, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpake pasādanīyasuttante paccavekkhantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu pītiuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
轻安觉支的生起是这样的:比丘们,有身轻安和心轻安。对这两者反复如理作意,这就是让还没生起的轻安觉支得以生起、让已经生起的轻安觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。
Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有七种法能帮助轻安觉支生起:吃好的食物、受用舒适的气候、受用舒适的威仪姿势、保持中舍的用功、远离身体躁动的人、亲近身体轻安的人、心倾向于这些。
吃好的、柔滑的、适合自己的食物时,轻安会生起;在冷热适中的气候中,在站、坐等威仪姿势中,受用适合自己的气候和威仪时,轻安也会生起。但如果一个人是大丈夫的根性,能忍受一切气候和威仪,这句话就不是针对他说的。只有对那些有相应与不相应之分的人,才要避开不相应的气候和威仪,受用相应的,轻安才会生起。
所谓中舍的用功,是指省察自己和他人都是业的主人。以这种中舍的用功,轻安会生起。
如果有人拿土块、棍棒等伤害别人、到处走动,这就是身体躁动的人,应当远离;手脚收摄、身体轻安的人,应当亲近。在站立、坐下等姿势中,为了让轻安生起,把心倾向、偏向、专注于此,轻安就会生起。
当轻安这样生起之后,他了知:通过阿拉汉道,它的修习就圆满了。
Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paṇītabhojanasevanatā utusukhasevanatā iriyāpathasukhasevanatā majjhattapayogatā sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Paṇītañhi siniddhaṃ sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjantassāpi, sītuṇhesu ca utūsu ṭhānādīsu ca iriyāpathesu sappāyautuñca iriyāpathañca sevantassāpi passaddhi uppajjati. Yo pana mahāpurisajātiko sabbautuiriyāpathakkhamo hoti, na taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yassa sabhāgavisabhāgatā atthi, tasseva visabhāge utuiriyāpathe vajjetvā sabhāge sevantassa uppajjati. Majjhattapayogo vuccati attano ca parassa ca kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā. Iminā majjhattapayogena uppajjati. Yo leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paraṃ viheṭhayamāno vicarati, evarūpaṃ sāraddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ parivajjantassāpi, saṃyatapādapāṇiṃ passaddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu passaddhiuppādanatthāya ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
定觉支的生起是这样的:“比丘们,有止的相,有不乱的相。在那里多作如理作意,这就是食,能令尚未生起的定觉支生起,也能令已经生起的定觉支增长、扩大、修习、圆满。”在这里,止本身就是止的相,也因为不散乱的意思而叫不乱的相。
Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro, anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha samathova samathanimittaṃ avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimittanti.
另外,有十一种法能帮助定觉支生起:依处清净的作为、使诸根平衡的修行、善巧把握相、在适当的时候策励心、在适当的时候抑制心、在适当的时候让心生欢喜、在适当的时候对心保持旁观、远离未得定的人、亲近已得定的人、观察禅那与解脱,以及心倾向于这些。其中,依处清净的作为和使诸根平衡的修行,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。
Apica ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti vatthuvisadakiriyatā indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā nimittakusalatā samaye cittassa paggaṇhanatā samaye cittassa niggaṇhanatā samaye sampahaṃsanatā samaye ajjhupekkhanatā asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā samāhitapuggalasevanatā jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha vatthuvisadakiriyatā ca indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
“相善巧”是指善于取遍相(似相)的善巧。“适时策励心”是指:当心因为精进过于松懈等原因而变得昏沉时,就在那个时候,通过发起择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支来策励它。“适时抑制心”是指:当心因为精进发动过强等原因而变得掉举时,就在那个时候,通过发起轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支来抑制它。“适时令心喜悦”是指:当心因为慧的运用迟钝,或者因为没有证得寂止之乐而变得没有滋味时,就在那个时候,通过观察八种悚惧事来令它生起悚惧。八种悚惧事是:生、老、病、死这四种,恶趣之苦是第五种,过去以轮回为根源的苦,未来以轮回为根源的苦,现在以寻求食物为根源的苦。又通过随念三宝的功德来生起净信。这称为“适时令心喜悦”。
Nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā. Samaye cittassa paggaṇhanatāti yasmiṃ samaye atisithilavīriyatādīhi līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa paggaṇhanaṃ. Samaye cittassa paggaṇhanatāti yasmiṃ samaye āraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa niggaṇhanaṃ. Samaye sampahaṃsanatāti yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti . Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jāti jarā byādhi maraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena ca pasādaṃ janeti, ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘samaye sampahaṃsanatā’’ti.
在适当的时候保持旁观,说的是:在那个时候,依靠正行道,心变得不昏沉、不掉举、不沉闷,在所缘上平稳地运转,进入止的轨道时,那时心对策励、抑制和令喜悦这些事都不再插手,就像车夫对已经平稳奔跑的马一样。这就叫作“在适当的时候保持旁观”。远离未得定的人,是指远远避开那些还没有达到近行定或安止定、心散乱的人。亲近已得定的人,是指亲近、交往、侍奉那些以近行定或安止定心得定的人。心倾向于那件事,是指在站立、坐下等姿势中,心为了生起定而低垂、朝向、倾向。这样修行的人,这个觉支就会生起。生起之后,他了知:以阿拉汉道,它的修习达到圆满。
Samaye ajjhupekkhanatā nāma yasmiṃ samaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadāssa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu na byāpāraṃ āpajjati, sārathi viya samappavattesu assesu. Ayaṃ vuccati – ‘‘samaye ajjhupekkhanatā’’ti. Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā nāma upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā appattānaṃ vikkhittacittānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Samāhitapuggalasevanā nāma upacārena vā appanāya vā samāhitacittānaṃ sevanā bhajanā payirupāsanā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu samādhiuppādanatthaṃyeva ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evañhi paṭipajjato esa uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
舍觉支的生起是这样的:“比丘们,有作为舍觉支基础的法,在那里反复如理作意,这就是尚未生起的舍觉支得以生起的食粮,也是已经生起的舍觉支得以增长、扩大、修习圆满的食粮。”在这里,作为舍觉支基础的法,其实就是舍本身。
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha upekkhāva upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma.
另外,有五种法能帮助舍觉支生起:对众生的中舍、对诸行的中舍、远离对众生和诸行耽著的人、亲近对众生和诸行保持中舍的人、心倾向于这些。
其中,以两种方式生起对众生的中舍:一是通过观察业是自己所有的——“你是凭自己的业而来的,也将凭自己的业而去;这个人也是凭自己的业而来,凭自己的业而去,你在顾恋谁呢?”二是通过观察没有众生——“从究竟意义上说,根本没有众生,你在顾恋谁呢?”
以两种方式生起对诸行的中舍:一是通过观察没有主人——“这件衣服会逐渐变色、变旧,最后成了擦脚布,被丢在棍子头上。如果它有主人,怎么会让它这样毁坏呢?”二是通过观察暂时性——“这是无常的,只是暂时存在的。”
对衣服是这样,对钵等物品也应当这样类推。
Apica pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti sattamajjhattatā saṅkhāramajjhattatā sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha dvīhākārehi sattamajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti ‘‘tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attanova kammena gamissasi, esopi attanova kammena āgantvā attanova kammena gamissati, tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’’ti evaṃ kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇena, ‘‘paramatthato sattoyeva natthi, so tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’’ti evaṃ nissattapaccavekkhaṇena cāti. Dvīhevākārehi saṅkhāramajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ anupubbena vaṇṇavikāratañceva jiṇṇabhāvañca upagantvā pādapuñchanacoḷakaṃ hutvā yaṭṭhikoṭiyā chaḍḍanīyaṃ bhavissati, sace panassa sāmiko bhaveyya, nāssa evaṃ vinassituṃ dadeyyā’’ti evaṃ assāmikabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena ca, ‘‘anaddhaniyaṃ idaṃ tāvakālika’’nti evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena cāti. Yathā ca cīvare, evaṃ pattādīsupi yojanā kātabbā.
远离耽著众生与诸行之人:在这里,如果有在家人对自己的儿女等人放不下,或者有出家人对自己的弟子、同住者、亲教师等人放不下,亲手给他们剃发、缝衣、洗袈裟、染衣、煮饭等,片刻不见就到处张望,像迷了路的鹿一样,心里念着“某位沙弥在哪里?某位小比丘在哪里?”别人为了剃发等事来求他说“请让某某暂时过来一下”,他也不放人,还说“我们自己都舍不得让他去干自己的事,你们把他带走,会把他累坏的”——这种人就叫耽著众生的人。
Sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatāti ettha yo puggalo gihi vā attano puttadhītādike, pabbajito vā attano antevāsikasamānupajjhāyakādike mamāyati, sahattheneva nesaṃ kesacchedanasūcikammacīvaradhovanarajanapattapacanādīni karoti, muhuttampi apassanto ‘‘asuko sāmaṇero kuhiṃ asuko daharo kuhi’’nti bhantamigo viya ito cito ca oloketi, aññena kesacchedanādīnaṃ atthāya ‘‘muhuttaṃ asukaṃ pesethā’’ti yāciyamānopi ‘‘amhepi taṃ attano kammaṃ na kārema, tumhe naṃ gahetvā kilamessathā’’ti na deti, ayaṃ sattakelāyano nāma.
如果有人把袈裟、钵、铜盘、剪刀、手杖等东西看作“我的”,连别人用手碰一下都不允许,当有人临时来借时,就说:“我们自己因为贪恋这些东西,都舍不得用,又能给你们什么呢?”这种人就叫耽著诸行的人。如果对这两类东西都保持中立、漠不关心,这种人就叫对众生和诸行保持中舍的人。这样,这个舍觉支,对于远离这种耽著众生和诸行的人,对于亲近对众生和诸行中舍的人,以及在站、坐等姿势中,内心为了让它生起而低下、朝向、倾向的人,都会生起。它这样生起之后,他以阿拉汉道使修习达到圆满,他如实了知。
Yo pana cīvarapattathālakakattarayaṭṭhiādīni mamāyati, aññassa hatthena parāmasitumpi na deti, tāvakālikaṃ yācito ‘‘mayampi idaṃ mamāyantā na paribhuñjāma, tumhākaṃ kiṃ dassāmā’’ti vadati, ayaṃ saṅkhārakelāyano nāma. Yo pana tesu dvīsupi vatthūsu majjhatto udāsino, ayaṃ sattasaṅkhāramajjhatto nāma. Iti ayaṃ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo evarūpaṃ sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaṃ ārakā parivajjantassāpi, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu taduppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
“或于内”等的意思是:像这样观察自己的七觉支,或者观察他人的七觉支,或者有时观察自己的七觉支、有时观察他人的七觉支,然后安住在对诸法的随观法中。这里,觉支的集起与灭去,应当从生起和灭去的角度来理解。从这里往后,和前面所说的方法一样。不过,这里要把摄持觉支的念当作苦谛,这样配合之后,应当了知摄持觉支的比丘的解脱门。其余部分与此相同。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā satta sambojjhaṅge pariggaṇhitvā, parassa vā, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa sambojjhaṅge pariggaṇhitvā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha sambojjhaṅgānaṃ nibbattinirodhavasena veditabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha bojjhaṅgapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā bojjhaṅgapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
四谛品注释
Catusaccapabbavaṇṇanā
386386. 这样,按七觉支分别讲完法随观之后,现在为了按四圣谛来分别,又说出“再者,比丘们……”等开头的话。其中,“他如实了知‘这是苦’”的意思是:除了渴爱之外,他对三界的一切法,都按照它们本来的样子了知为“这是苦”;对那能产生苦、使苦生起的先前的渴爱,他按照它本来的样子了知为“这是苦的集起”;对这两者都不再生起的涅槃,他按照它本来的样子了知为“这是苦的息灭”;对遍知苦、舍断集起、证得息灭的圣道,他按照它本来的样子了知为“这是通向苦之息灭的道路”。这就是这段话的意思。关于圣谛的其余论述,除了对“生”等词句的逐项解释之外,在《清净道论》中已经详细说明了。
386. Evaṃ sattabojjhaṅgavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni catusaccavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ tebhūmakadhamme ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti yathāsabhāvato pajānāti, tasseva kho pana dukkhassa janikaṃ samuṭṭhāpikaṃ purimataṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti, ubhinnaṃ appavattinibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti, dukkhaparijānanaṃ samudayapajahanaṃ nirodhasacchikaraṇaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadā’’ti yathāsabhāvato pajānātīti attho. Avasesā ariyasaccakathā ṭhapetvā jātiādīnaṃ padabhājanakathaṃ visuddhimagge vitthāritāyeva.
苦谛分别的注释
Dukkhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
388在词语分解部分,关于“诸比丘,什么是生?”这样问的时候,应当理解:在所有这些问句中,意思都是:“诸比丘,所谓‘生也是苦’,那个生是什么呢?”其中“那些众生的”这一说法,因为并没有限定“只是这些众生的名字”,所以是总括一切众生的表达。“在种种有情类中”这一说法,同样是总括一切有情类的表达。“生”“出生”:这是对已发生变异的、最初生起的诸蕴的另一种说法。“已生”:这是对同一个东西,加上前缀修饰后的别名。那个“入”:是以进入的方式,从“进入”这个意义来说的。“再生”:是以“再生”这个意义,从“再次生起”来说的。以上这四种,都属于世俗层面的说法。而“诸蕴的显现”这一句,则是从胜义层面来说的。在只有一蕴、四蕴、五蕴等不同分类的生存状态中,显现的只是诸蕴而已,并不是有一个“人”显现出来;但当诸蕴显现时,只是约定俗成地说“人显现了”而已。“诸处的获得”:诸处正在显现时,就说它们被获得了,意思就是,那个“诸处的显现”被称为“获得”。
388. Padabhājane pana katamā ca, bhikkhave, jātīti bhikkhave, yā jātipi dukkhāti evaṃ vuttā jāti, sā katamāti evaṃ sabbapucchāsu attho veditabbo. Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānanti idaṃ ‘‘imesaṃ nāmā’’ti niyamābhāvato sabbasattānaṃ pariyādānavacanaṃ. Tamhi tamhi sattanikāyeti idampi sabbasattanikāyapariyādānavacanaṃ jananaṃ jāti savikārānaṃ paṭhamābhinibbattakkhandhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sañjātīti idaṃ tassā eva upasaggamaṇḍitavevacanaṃ. Sā eva anupaviṭṭhākārena okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti. Nibbattisaṅkhātena abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti. Iti ayaṃ catubbidhāpi sammutikathā nāma . Khandhānaṃ pātubhāvoti ayaṃ pana paramatthakathā. Ekavokārabhavādīsu ekacatupañcabhedānaṃ khandhānaṃyeva pātubhāvo, na puggalassa, tasmiṃ pana sati puggalo pātubhūtoti vohāramattaṃ hoti. Āyatanānaṃ paṭilābhoti āyatanāni pātubhavantāneva paṭiladdhāni nāma honti, so tesaṃ pātubhāvasaṅkhāto paṭilābhoti attho.
389“老”是就它的自性来指明的。“老化”是就它的状态来指明的。“齿落”等以下,是就它的变异来指明的。因为在年轻时,牙齿整齐洁白。当它们逐渐成熟衰老时,便次第发生颜色的变异,在各处脱落。于是,依据已经脱落和仍然留存的牙齿,就称为“缺齿”。缺齿的状态,就叫做“齿落”。头发和体毛逐渐变成白色,就称为“白发”。已经生起了白发,就说他“有白发”,有白发的状态就是“白发性”。由于衰老之风的打击,血肉干枯,皮肤上出现皱纹,就说他“有皱皮”,有皱皮的状态就是“皮皱”。到这里为止,通过显示牙齿、头发、体毛和皮肤上的变异,就显示了明显可见的“显老”。
389.Jarāti sabhāvaniddeso. Jīraṇatāti ākārabhāvaniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādi vikāraniddeso. Daharakālasmiñhi dantā samasetā honti. Teyeva paripaccante anukkamena vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjitvā tattha tattha pattanti. Atha patitañca ṭhitañca upādāya khaṇḍitadantā khaṇḍitā nāma. Khaṇḍitānaṃ bhāvo khaṇḍiccanti vuccati. Anukkamena paṇḍarabhūtāni kesalomāni palitāni nāma. Palitāni sañjātāni assāti palito, palitassa bhāvo pāliccaṃ. Jarāvātappahārena sositamaṃsalohitatāya valiyo tacasmiṃ assāti valittaco, tassa bhāvo valittacatā. Ettāvatā dantakesalomatacesu vikāradassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā.
就像水、风或火经过之后,草木等被摧毁折断或烧焦,它们走过的痕迹是看得见的,但那条痕迹并不是水、风或火本身。同样地,衰老通过牙齿脱落等变化显示出来,即使睁开眼睛也能看到,但牙齿脱落等变化并不是衰老本身。因为衰老并不是眼识所能认知的对象。然而,当一个人到了衰老的阶段,他的寿命会减损,所以借用结果来称呼,说衰老是“寿命的减损”。又因为在年轻时,眼等诸根非常清净,能够轻松地把握极其细微的对象,但到了衰老的阶段,它们变得成熟、混乱、不清晰,连粗大的对象都无法把握,所以也是借用结果来称呼,说衰老是“诸根的成熟”。
Yatheva hi udakassa vā vātassa vā aggino vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ saṃbhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīnaṃ khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, cakkhuṃ ummiletvāpi gayhati, na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā. Na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti. Yasmā pana jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā. Yasmā daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva ca gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni ālulitāni avisadāni oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’tipi phalūpacāreneva vuttā.
390在解释“死”时,“凡”这个中性词是用来指死亡的。这里的句子结构是:那被称为“死殁”的死亡,被称为“死殁性”。其中,“死殁”是从自性来说明的,“死殁性”是从状态来说明的。对于已经达到死亡的人,他的诸蕴既被破坏,又消失不见,归于不可见,因此那个死被称为“破坏、消失”。“死殁之死”指的是通常的死,不是刹那死。“寿尽”指临终时的寿尽。所有这些都只是世俗层面的说法。而“诸蕴的破坏”这一句,则是从究竟义上说的。在单蕴有等生存地中,只有或一蕴、或四蕴、或五蕴等不同分类的诸蕴坏灭,而不是补特伽罗的坏灭;只是当那种坏灭存在时,假名说“补特伽罗死了”而已。
390. Maraṇaniddese yanti maraṇaṃ sandhāya napuṃsakaniddeso, yaṃ maraṇaṃ cutīti vuccati, cavanatāti vuccatīti ayamettha yojanā. Tattha cutīti sabhāvaniddeso. Cavanatāti ākārabhāvaniddeso. Maraṇaṃ pattassa khandhā bhijjanti ceva antaradhāyanti ca adassanaṃ gacchanti, tasmā taṃ bhedo antaradhānanti vuccati. Maccumaraṇanti maccumaraṇaṃ, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ. Kālakiriyāti maraṇakālakiriyā. Ayaṃ sabbāpi sammutikathāva. Khandhānaṃ bhedoti ayaṃ pana paramatthakathā. Ekavokārabhavādīsu ekacatupañcabhedānaṃ khandhānaṃyeva bhedo, na puggalassa, tasmiṃ pana sati puggalo matoti vohāramattaṃ hoti.
“遗骸的舍弃”是指舍弃自身。因为对已经到达死亡的人来说,那自身就像无用的朽木一样倒下,所以称为“遗骸的舍弃”。不过,从一切方面、从究竟意义上来说,“命根的断绝”才是死。这也被称为“假名死”。因为世间人正是抓住命根断绝这一点,才说“帝萨死了,普萨死了”。
Kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti attabhāvassa nikkhepo. Maraṇaṃ pattassa hi niratthaṃva kaliṅgaraṃ attabhāvo patati, tasmā taṃ kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti vuttaṃ. Jīvitindriyassa upacchedo pana sabbākārato paramatthato maraṇaṃ. Etadeva sammutimaraṇanti pi vuccati. Jīvitindriyupacchedameva hi gahetvā lokiyā ‘‘tisso mato, phusso mato’’ti vadanti.
391“以灾祸”是指亲属遭遇灾祸等任何一种灾祸。“以苦法”是指杀戮、捆绑等造成痛苦的方式。“被触及”是指被压制、被征服。“忧”是指当亲属遭遇灾祸,或遭遇杀戮、捆绑等任何一种灾祸时,被其征服的人内心生起的、以忧愁为特征的忧伤。“忧伤性”就是忧伤的状态。然而,这种忧伤生起时会在内心不断消耗、枯竭,所以称为内忧、内涸。
391.Byasanenāti ñātibyasanādīsu yena kenaci byasanena. Dukkhadhammenāti vadhabandhādinā dukkhakāraṇena. Phuṭṭhassāti ajjhotthaṭassa abhibhūtassa. Sokoti yo ñātibyasanādīsu vā vadhabandhanādīsu vā aññatarasmiṃ sati tena abhibhūtassa uppajjati socanalakkhaṇo soko. Socitattanti socitabhāvo. Yasmā panesa abbhantare sosento parisosento uppajjati, tasmā antosoko antoparisokoti vuccati.
392“我的女儿!”
“我的儿子!”像这样一次次哀号着哭泣,因此叫哀号。逐一描述各种形貌而哭泣,因此叫悲叹。之后有两种对它的状态说明。
392. ‘‘Mayhaṃ dhītā, mayhaṃ putto’’ti evaṃ ādissa ādissa devanti paridevanti etenāti ādevo. Taṃ taṃ vaṇṇaṃ parikittetvā devanti etenāti paridevo. Tato parā dve tasseva bhāvaniddesā.
393身所依的:以身体净色为依托。苦:从苦的意义上说是苦。不乐:就是不甜美、不愉悦。身触所生苦:就是从身触生出来的苦。不乐受:就是不愉悦的感受。
393.Kāyikanti kāyapasādavatthukaṃ. Dukkhamanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ. Asātanti amadhuraṃ. Kāyasamphassajaṃ dukkhanti kāyasamphassato jātaṃ dukkhaṃ. Asātaṃ vedayitanti amadhuraṃ vedayitaṃ.
394“心所”是指与心相应的。其余部分,就按照讲“苦”时所说的那样来理解。
394.Cetasikanti cittasampayuttaṃ. Sesaṃ dukkhe vuttanayameva.
395“恼”是指心陷入消沉、萎靡状态的心疲劳。比恼更强烈的,叫“大恼”。接下来的两个词,是说明无我、无我所状态的进一步解释。
395.Āyāsoti saṃsīdanavisīdanākārappatto cittakilamatho. Balavataraṃ āyāso upāyāso. Tato parā dve attattaniyābhāvadīpakā bhāvaniddesā.
398“有生法”指的是具有生的本性的事物。“欲求生起”就是渴爱生起。“啊,但愿”是希求。“然而这并非仅凭欲求”是说:想要不再有生,如果不修习圣道,就不可能只靠欲求达到。“这也”中的“也”,是把这一项和下面其余各项一起包括进来。“凡以欲求”是说:以任何一种方式去欲求不可得之物而得不到,那种对不可得之物的欲求就是苦。这个道理遍及一切处。
398.Jātidhammānanti jātisabhāvānaṃ. Icchā uppajjatīti taṇhā uppajjati. Aho vatāti patthanā. Na kho panetaṃ icchāyāti evaṃ jātiyā anāgamanaṃ vinā maggabhāvanaṃ na icchāya pattabbaṃ. Idampīti etampi upari sesāni upādāya pikāro. Yampicchanti yenapi dhammena alabbhaneyyavatthuṃ icchanto na labhati, taṃ alabbhaneyya vatthumhi icchanaṃ dukkhaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.
399在解释五蕴的部分,色本身以及它作为取蕴,合起来就叫色取蕴;一切地方都按这个方式理解。
399. Khandhaniddese rūpañca taṃ upādānakkhandho cāti rūpupādānakkhandho evaṃ sabbattha.
集谛的解释注释
Samudayasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
400这里所说的“那种渴爱”,就是指这种渴爱。“导致再有”,是说能造出下一世的存在;下一世的存在就是再有,它的本性就是让再生发生,所以叫导致再有。“与喜贪俱行”,就是和喜贪一起生起;从意义上看,是说和喜贪合为一体。“于处处欢喜”,是说无论在哪里得到生命存在,就在那里欢喜;或者说,在色等种种所缘对象中处处欢喜,也就是欢喜色、欢喜声、欢喜香、欢喜味、欢喜触、欢喜法。“seyyathidaṃ”是个引出下文的词,意思是“那是什么呢”。“欲渴爱”,是对欲乐的渴爱,这是对五种欲乐之贪染的名称。“有渴爱”,是对存在的渴爱,这是以希求存在而生起的、与常见相应的、对色界和无色界存在的贪染,也是对禅那之耽著的别名。“无有渴爱”,是对断灭的渴爱,这是与断见相应的贪染的别名。
400.Yāyaṃ taṇhāti yā ayaṃ taṇhā. Ponobbhavikāti punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punobbhavo, punobbhavo sīlaṃ assāti ponobbhavikā. Nandīrāgena saha gatāti nandīrāgasahagatā. Nandīrāgena saddhiṃ atthato ekattameva gatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatratatrābhinandinīti yatra yatra attabhāvo, tatra tatra abhinandinī. Rūpādīsu vā ārammaṇesu tatra tatra abhinandinī, rūpābhinandinī sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba, dhammābhinandinīti attho. Seyyathidanti nipāto. Tassa sā katamā ceti attho. Kāme taṇhā kāmataṇhā, pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Bhave taṇhā bhavataṇhā, bhavapatthanāvasena uppannassa sassatadiṭṭhisahagatassa rūpārūpabhavarāgassa ca jhānanikantiyā cetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vibhave taṇhā vibhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
现在,为了详细说明那渴爱的所依处,说了“sā kho panesā”等话。其中,“生起”就是产生。“坚住”就是借着反复转起而得以安立。“世间中可爱、可意之物”,就是世间中那些具有令人喜爱之本性以及甘美之本性的事物。在“眼在世间”等语句中,世间有情因为对眼等以我所执而深深固著,在有所成就时,便依照在镜面等处取相的方式,把眼想像成清净的五净色,如同黄金宫殿中敞开的宝石狮窗;把耳想像成银制的管筒,或如腰带之线;把被称为“高鼻”的鼻,想像成安设的黄色颜料团;把舌想像成一张柔软、细滑、甘甜的红毛毯片;把身想像成沙罗树干,或如黄金拱门;把意想像成与他人之意全然不同、无比殊胜。又认为色如同金色花、翅子树花等的颜色;声如同迷醉的驯鸟、杜鹃,或低声轻鸣的宝石笛音;对于自己所获得的四种所生香等所缘,则想:“别人谁能有这样的呢?”对如此想像的他们来说,那些眼等便成为可爱与可意的。于是,对他们而言,在那里面,未生的渴爱生起,已生的渴爱则借着反复转起而坚住。因此,世尊说了“眼在世间是可爱、可意的,在这里,那渴爱生起时便生起”等话。其中,“生起时”是说:当它正在生起时,就在那里生起。这个道理在一切处都一样。
Idāni tassā taṇhāya vatthuṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha uppajjatīti jāyati. Nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhahati. Yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti yaṃ lokasmiṃ piyasabhāvañceva madhurasabhāvañca. Cakkhu loketiādīsu lokasmiñhi cakkhādīsu mamattena abhiniviṭṭhā sattā sampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhitā attano cakkhuṃ ādāsatalādīsu nimittaggahaṇānusārena vippasannaṃ pañcapasādaṃ suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjaraṃ viya maññanti, sotaṃ rajatapanāḷikaṃ viya, pāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya ca maññanti, ‘‘tuṅganāsā’’ti laddhavohāraṃ ghānaṃ vaṭṭitvā ṭhapitaharitālavaṭṭaṃ viya maññanti, jivhaṃ rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya mudusiniddhamadhurasadaṃ maññanti, kāyaṃ sālalaṭṭhiṃ viya, suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya ca maññanti, manaṃ aññesaṃ manena asadisaṃ uḷāraṃ maññanti. Rūpaṃ suvaṇṇakaṇikārapupphādivaṇṇaṃ viya, saddaṃ mattakaravīka kokilamandadhamitamaṇivaṃsanigghosaṃ viya, attanā paṭiladdhāni catusamuṭṭhānikagandhārammaṇādīni ‘‘kassaññassa evarūpāni atthī’’ti maññanti. Tesaṃ evaṃ maññamānānaṃ tāni cakkhādīni piyarūpāni ceva sātarūpāni ca honti. Atha nesaṃ tattha anuppannā ceva taṇhā uppajjati , uppannā ca taṇhā punappunaṃ pavattivasena nivisati. Tasmā bhagavā ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppajjamānāti yadā uppajjamānā hoti, tadā ettha uppajjatīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha.
灭谛的解释的注释
Nirodhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
401“无余离贪灭尽”等等,全部都是涅槃的同义词。因为依靠涅槃,渴爱才彻底离染、灭尽,所以涅槃被称为“那渴爱的无余离贪灭尽”。又因为依靠涅槃,渴爱被舍弃、被遣除、被解脱、不再执著,所以涅槃被称为“舍、遣、解脱、无着”。涅槃其实只有一种,但相对于一切有为法的名称,它有许多不同的名称。比如:无余离贪、无余灭尽、舍、遣、解脱、无着、贪尽、嗔尽、痴尽、渴爱尽、不生、不转起、无相、无愿、不积集、不结生、不再生、无去处、无生、无老、无病、不死、无愁、无悲、无恼、无杂染。
401.Asesavirāganirodhotiādīni sabbāni nibbānavevacanāneva. Nibbānañhi āgamma taṇhā asesā virajjati nirujjhati, tasmā taṃ ‘‘tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho’’ti vuccati. Nibbānañca āgamma taṇhā cajiyati paṭinissajjiyati vimuccati na allīyati, tasmā nibbānaṃ ‘‘cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo’’ti vuccati. Ekameva hi nibbānaṃ, nāmāni panassa sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ nāmapaṭipakkhavasena anekāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ, asesavirāgo asesanirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo taṇhakkhayo anuppādo appavattaṃ animittaṃ appaṇihitaṃ anāyūhanaṃ appaṭisandhi anupapatti agati ajātaṃ ajaraṃ abyādhi amataṃ asokaṃ aparidevaṃ anupāyāsaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhanti.
现在,为了说明渴爱虽已被圣道斩断、并依涅槃而达到不再生起,但在那些已显示其生起的依处上它却不存在,所以说了“sā kho panesā”等话。其中,就像有人看见田里长出的苦葫芦藤,从顶端开始寻找根部,把它切断,它就会逐渐枯萎,最终不再被认定存在。于是就可以说,那块田里的苦葫芦已经被止息、被除去了。同样地,在眼等处,渴爱就像田里的苦葫芦。它被圣道从根部切断,依靠涅槃而不再生起。这样不再生起之后,在那些依处上,它就像田里的苦葫芦一样不再显现。
Idāni maggena chinnāya nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattipattāyapi ca taṇhāya yesu vatthūsu tassā uppatti dassitā, tattheva abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha yathā puriso khette jātaṃ tittaalābuvalliṃ disvā aggato paṭṭhāya mūlaṃ pariyesitvā chindeyya, sā anupubbena milāyitvā apaññattiṃ gaccheyya. Tato tasmiṃ khette tittaalābu niruddhā pahīnāti vucceyya, evameva khette tittaalābu viya cakkhādīsu taṇhā. Sā ariyamaggena mūlacchinnā nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattiṃ gacchati. Evaṃ gatā pana tesu vatthūsu khette tittaalābu viya na paññāyati.
就像有人把盗贼从森林里抓出来,带到城的南门处死,之后人们会说“森林里的盗贼死了”或者“被杀了”。同样,在眼等诸处,渴爱就像森林里的盗贼。它如同在南门被处死的盗贼一样,因为达到涅槃而灭尽,所以在涅槃中已灭。这样灭尽之后,它在这些所依处就像森林里的盗贼一样不再显现。为了说明它就在那里灭去,便说了“眼在世间是可喜、可意的,在这里,这渴爱正在被断除时就在此断除,正在灭尽时就在此灭尽”等话。
Yathā ca aṭavito core ānetvā nagarassa dakkhiṇadvāre ghāteyyuṃ, tato aṭaviyaṃ corā matāti vā māritāti vā vucceyyuṃ, evaṃ aṭaviyaṃ corā viya cakkhādīsu taṇhā. Sā dakkhiṇadvāre corā viya nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhattā nibbāne niruddhā. Evaṃ niruddhā panetesu vatthūsu aṭaviyaṃ corā viya na paññāyati, tenassā tattheva nirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’tiādimāha.
第4章 道谛的解说注释
Maggasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
402“正是这个”:这是为了排除其他道路而作的限定。“圣”:因为远离了那些应当被道断除的烦恼,也因为能成就圣者的境界,所以称为圣。以“于苦智”等语句,开示了四谛的修行法门。其中,前两个谛属于轮回,后两个谛属于出离。对于这位比丘,在轮回二谛上有对修行法门的投入修习,在出离二谛上则没有投入。因为前二谛,即“五蕴是苦,渴爱是集”,行者既要简要地掌握,又要按“什么是五蕴?色蕴……”等方式在老师面前详细学习之后,通过反复读诵语句来修习,瑜伽行者就是这样用功的。而对于后二谛,灭谛是可爱、可喜、合意的,道谛也是可爱、可喜、合意的——他是通过这样听闻来用功的。他这样用功时,以一次通达就通达四谛,以一次现观就现观。以遍知通达而通达苦,以断除通达而通达集,以作证通达而通达灭,以修习通达而通达道。以遍知现观……乃至以修习现观而现观道。如此,在预备阶段,他对前二谛有学习、遍问、听闻、忆持、思惟的通达,对后二谛则只有听闻的通达。在后一阶段,对前三谛有作用上的通达,对灭谛则有以之为所缘的通达。而省察智是已证得圣果的人才有的。但这位是初修业者,所以这里没有提到省察智。
402.Ayamevāti aññamaggapaṭikkhepanatthaṃ niyamanaṃ. Ariyoti taṃ taṃ maggavajjhehi kilesehi ārakattā ariyabhāvakarattā ca ariyo. Dukkhe ñāṇantiādinā catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ. Tattha purimāni dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, pacchimāni vivaṭṭaṃ. Tesu bhikkhuno vaṭṭe kammaṭṭhānābhiniveso hoti, vivaṭṭe natthi abhiniveso. Purimāni hi dve saccāni ‘‘pañcakkhandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā samudayo’’ti evaṃ saṅkhepena ca ‘‘katame pañcakkhandhā, rūpakkhandho’’tiādinā nayena vitthārena ca ācariyassa santike uggaṇhitvā vācāya punappunaṃ parivattento yogāvacaro kammaṃ karoti. Itaresu pana dvīsu saccesu nirodhasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpaṃ, maggasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpanti evaṃ savanena kammaṃ karoti. So evaṃ karonto cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhati ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena…pe… maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti. Evamassa pubbabhāge dvīsu saccesu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇasammasanapaṭivedho hoti, dvīsu pana savanapaṭivedhoyeva. Aparabhāge tīsu kiccato paṭivedho hoti, nirodhe ārammaṇapaṭivedho. Paccavekkhaṇā pana pattasaccassa hoti. Ayañca ādikammiko, tasmā sā idha na vuttā.
这位比丘在摄持之前,并没有“我遍知苦,我断除集,我作证灭,我修习道”这样的转向、作意、作意、省察;从摄持开始才有。到了后来,苦已经被遍知……乃至道已经被修习。其中,有两个谛因为难以见而称为甚深,有两个谛因为甚深而称为难见。苦谛从生起方面来说是很明显的:比如被树桩、棘刺伤到等时候,人们也会说出“哎哟,苦”。集谛也从想吃、想受用等欲望的生起而显得明显。但从通达它们的特相来说,两者都是甚深的。因此,它们因为难见而甚深。而为了见到另外两个谛所付出的努力,就像为了抓住梵天顶而伸出手臂,为了碰到无间地狱而伸出脚,又像把劈成百份的一根毛发的尖端与尖端对接起来那样。所以,它们因为甚深而难见。对于这样因难见而甚深、因甚深而难见的四谛,在学习等预备智慧生起的阶段,才说了“于苦智”等话。但在通达的刹那,那种智慧只有一种。
Imassa ca bhikkhuno pubbe pariggahato ‘‘dukkhaṃ parijānāmi, samudayaṃ pajahāmi, nirodhaṃ sacchikaromi, maggaṃ bhāvemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahato paṭṭhāya hoti. Aparabhāge pana dukkhaṃ pariññātameva…pe… maggo bhāvitova hoti. Tattha dve saccāni duddasattā gambhīrāni, dve gambhīrattā duddasāni. Dukkhasaccañhi uppattito pākaṭaṃ, khāṇukaṇṭakapahārādīsu ‘‘aho dukkha’’nti vattabbatampi āpajjati. Samudayampi khāditukāmatābhuñjitukāmatādivasena uppattito pākaṭaṃ. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhato pana ubhayampi gambhīraṃ. Iti tāni duddasattā gambhīrāni. Itaresaṃ pana dvinnaṃ dassanatthāya payogo bhavaggagahaṇatthaṃ hatthappasāraṇaṃ viya avīciphusanatthaṃ pādappasāraṇaṃ viya satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭipādanaṃ viya ca hoti. Iti tāni gambhīrattā duddasāni. Evaṃ duddasattā gambhīresu gambhīrattā ca duddasesu catūsu saccesu uggahādivasena pubbabhāgañāṇuppattiṃ sandhāya idaṃ dukkhe ñāṇantiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭivedhakkhaṇe pana ekameva taṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti.
出离思惟等,因为所对的离欲想、离嗔想、离害想各不相同,所以在加行阶段是各不相同的;但在道刹那,针对这三种情况,由于所生起的不善思惟已被逐段截断,以令其不再生起的方式圆满道支,生起的善思惟只有一个。这就叫正思惟。
Nekkhammasaṅkappādayo kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāviramaṇasaññānaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesu tīsu ṭhānesu uppannassa akusalasaṅkappassa padapacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamāno ekova kusalasaṅkappo uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāsaṅkappo nāma.
离妄语等戒,也因为对“离妄语”等的想各有不同,所以在加行阶段是各不相同的;但在道刹那,对于这四种情况,已生起的不善的破戒之思,以截断其相续、令其不再生起的方式,使道支得以圆满,此时生起的只是单一的善离。这就叫作正语。
Musāvādāveramaṇiādayopi musāvādādīhi viramaṇasaññānaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesu catūsu ṭhānesu uppannāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya padapacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva kusalaveramaṇī uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāvācā nāma .
离杀生等戒,也因为在加行阶段对离杀生等的想各有不同而各不相同;但在道刹那,对于这三处所生起的不善恶戒之思,以不造作、截断相续、令不再生的方式圆满道支,只有单一的善离生起。这就叫作正业。
Pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādayopi pāṇātipātādīhi viramaṇasaññānaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesu tīsu ṭhānesu uppannāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya akiriyato padapacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva kusalaveramaṇī uppajjati, ayaṃ sammākammanto nāma.
邪命:就是为了吃硬食、软食等目的而造作的身语恶行。舍弃:就是避开。以正命:就是以佛陀所赞叹的谋生方式。维持生命:就是让生命延续下去。正命也是这样:由于远离诡诈等想各有差别,在加行阶段各不相同;但在道刹那,对于在这七个地方生起的邪命恶戒之思,以截断相续、令其不再生起的方式圆满道支时,只有单一的善离生起。这就叫作正命。
Micchāājīvanti khādanīyabhojanīyādīnaṃ atthāya pavattitaṃ kāyavacīduccaritaṃ. Pahāyāti vajjetvā. Sammāājīvenāti buddhapasatthena ājīvena. Jīvitaṃ kappetīti jīvitappavattiṃ pavatteti. Sammāājīvopi kuhanādīhi viramaṇasaññānaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesuyeva sattasu ṭhānesu uppannāya micchājīvadussīlyacetanāya padapacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva kusalaveramaṇī uppajjati, ayaṃ sammāājīvo nāma.
“未生”是指:在某一期生命里,或者面对某种所缘时,自己还没有生起的那些法。不过,看到别人正在生起时,心想:“真希望我这样的恶不善法不要生起。”——就是为了让这些未生的恶不善法不生起。
“生起志欲”:就是为了实践令它们不生起的行道,而生起精进的意愿。
“策励”:就是施加努力。
“发勤精进”:就是发起精进。
“令心勇悍”:就是用精进使心勇悍。
“策厉”:就是下定决心:“纵然只剩下皮肤、筋、骨,也一定要坚持精进。”
Anuppannānanti ekasmiṃ vā bhave tathārūpe vā ārammaṇe attano na uppannānaṃ. Parassa pana uppajjamāne disvā ‘‘aho vata me evarūpā pāpakā akusaladhammā na uppajjeyyu’’nti evaṃ anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya. Chandaṃ janetīti tesaṃ anuppādakapaṭipattisādhakaṃ vīriyachandaṃ janeti. Vāyamatīti vāyāmaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti vīriyaṃ pavatteti. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti vīriyena cittaṃ paggahitaṃ karoti. Padahatīti kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatūti padahanaṃ pavatteti.
已生起的:指通过现行而自己过去曾生起的那些。现在心想“我不会再生起那样的法”,于是为了断除它们而生起志欲。未生起的善法:指尚未获得的初禅等。已生起的:指那些已经获得的。为了安住:通过反复生起、保持相续而安住。为了不忘失:为了不让它们消失。为了增长:为了更上一层。为了广大:为了达到广大的状态。为了修习圆满:为了让修习达到圆满。这正精进也是同样,在加行阶段,由于未生恶法令不生等心念的多样性而有种种差别;但在道刹那,于这四种处所中,以成就作用的方式圆满道支时,生起的善精进只有一种。这就叫正精进。
Uppannānanti samudācāravasena attano uppannapubbānaṃ. Idāni tādise na uppādessāmīti tesaṃ pahānāya chandaṃ janeti. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānanti appaṭiladdhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ. Uppannānanti tesaṃyeva paṭiladdhānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti punappunaṃ uppattipabandhavasena ṭhitatthaṃ. Asammosāyāti avināsanatthaṃ. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti uparibhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāya pāripūriyāti bhāvanāya paripūraṇatthaṃ. Ayampi sammāvāyāmo anuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ anuppādanādicittānaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesuyeva catūsu ṭhānesu kiccasādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānaṃ ekameva kusalavīriyaṃ uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāvāyāmo nāma.
正念也是这样:在加行阶段,由于执取身体等对象的心有多种多样,正念也就有多种多样;但在道刹那,正念在四种处所中,以完成作用的方式圆满道支,生起的念只有一种。这就叫正念。
Sammāsatipi kāyādipariggāhakacittānaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana catūsu ṭhānesu kiccasādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sati uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāsati nāma.
诸禅那在预备阶段和道刹那都有不同:在预备阶段,因为等至的不同而有不同;在道刹那,则因为道的种类不同而有不同。对同一个人来说,初道是初禅的,第二道等则可能是初禅的,也可能是第二禅等中某一种禅那的。对同一个人来说,初道也可能是第二禅等中某一种禅那的,第二道等也可能是第二禅等中某一种禅那的,或者是初禅的。这样一来,四种道依禅那来说,或者完全相同,或者完全不同,或者部分相同。而这里的差别,是由作为基础的禅那所决定的。
Jhānāni pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi nānā, pubbabhāge samāpattivasena nānā, maggakkhaṇe nānāmaggavasena. Ekassa hi paṭhamamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, dutiyamaggādayopi paṭhamajjhānikā vā dutiyajjhānādīsu aññatarajhānikā vā. Ekassapi paṭhamamaggo dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajhāniko hoti, dutiyādayopi dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajjhānikā vā paṭhamajjhānikā vā. Evaṃ cattāropi maggā jhānavasena sadisā vā asadisā vā ekaccasadisā vā honti. Ayaṃ panassa viseso pādakajjhānaniyamena hoti.
按照作为基础的禅那来判定:证得初禅的人,从初禅出定后修观,这时生起的道就是初禅道。在这里,道支和觉支都是圆满的。从第二禅出定后修观,生起的道就是第二禅道。在这里,道支有七个。从第三禅出定后修观,生起的道就是第三禅道。在这里,道支有七个,觉支有六个。从第四禅出定后修观,直到非想非非想处,也都是同样的道理。
Pādakajjhānaniyamena tāva paṭhamajjhānalābhino paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno maggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti. Maggaṅgabojjhaṅgāni panettha paripuṇṇāneva honti. Dutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno dutiyajjhāniko hoti. Maggaṅgāni panettha satta honti. Tatiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno tatiyajjhāniko. Maggaṅgāni panettha satta , bojjhaṅgāni cha honti. Esa nayo catutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ.
在无色界生起四禅和五禅,那既是出世间的,不是世间的——这样说,在这里该怎么理解呢?这里也是同样的道理:从初禅等定出起之后,证得入流道,再修习无色定,以无色定而生到无色界;因为他有禅那作为基础,所以在无色界中生起其余三道。这样,就是由基础禅那来决定的。
Āruppe catukkapañcakajjhānaṃ uppajjati, tañca lokuttaraṃ, no lokiyanti vuttaṃ, ettha kathanti? Etthāpi paṭhamajjhānādīsu yato vuṭṭhāya sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilabhitvā arūpasamāpattiṃ bhāvetvā so āruppe uppanno, taṃ jhānikāvassa tattha tayo maggā uppajjanti. Evaṃ pādakajjhānameva niyameti.
有些长老说:“作为观所缘的诸蕴决定道。”有些人说:“个人的意乐决定道。”有些人说:“导向出起的观决定道。”这些观点的判定,应当依照《清净道论》中“导向出起的观”那一节所讲的方式来理解。
Keci pana therā ‘‘vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā niyamentī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘puggalajjhāsayo niyametī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā niyametī’’ti vadanti. Tesaṃ vādavinicchayo visuddhimagge vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanādhikāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
比丘们,这被称为正定:它在前期阶段是世间的,在后期阶段是出世间的,这就称为正定。
Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāsamādhīti ayaṃ pubbabhāge lokiyo aparabhāge lokuttaro sammāsamādhīti vuccati.
“如是于内”的意思是:这样,或者把握自己的四圣谛,或者把握他人的四圣谛,或者有时把握自己的、有时把握他人的四圣谛,然后安住在对诸法的法随观中。这里所说的“集与灭”,应当根据四圣谛各自的情况,从生起和止息两个方面来理解。从这里往后,都和前面所说的一样。只是在这里,应当把能把握四圣谛的正念,按照“苦圣谛”等这样的方式连接起来理解:这就是把握圣谛的比丘趣向解脱的门径,其余部分也和前面一样。
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā cattāri saccāni pariggaṇhitvā, parassa vā, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa cattāri saccāni pariggaṇhitvā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha catunnaṃ saccānaṃ yathāsambhāvato uppattinivattivasena veditabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha catusaccapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā saccapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ, sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
404到这里为止,一共讲了二十一种业处:入出息部分、四威仪部分、四正知部分、三十二身分、四界差别、九种墓观、受随观、心随观、盖的把握、蕴的把握、处的把握、觉支的把握、圣谛的把握。其中,入出息、三十二身分和九种墓观,这十一种属于安止业处。不过长部诵者玛哈斯瓦长老说:“九种墓观是依过患随观而说的。”所以按他的观点,安止业处只有两种,其余都是近行业处。那么,在这些业处当中,是不是每一种都会生起投入呢?不会。在威仪、正知、盖、觉支这些业处中,不会生起投入;在其余的业处中则会生起。可是玛哈斯瓦长老说:“在这些业处中也会生起投入。因为修行者会这样审察:我到底有没有四威仪?有没有四正知?有没有五盖?有没有七觉支?所以,一切业处中都会生起投入。”
404. Ettāvatā ānāpānapabbaṃ catuiriyāpathapabbaṃ catusampajaññapabbaṃ dvattiṃsākāraṃ catudhātuvavatthānaṃ navasivathikā vedanānupassanā cittānupassanā nīvaraṇapariggaho khandhapariggaho āyatanapariggaho bojjhaṅgapariggaho saccapariggahoti ekavīsati kammaṭṭhānāni. Tesu ānāpānaṃ dvattiṃsākāraṃ navasivathikāti ekādasa appanākammaṭṭhānāni honti. Dīghabhāṇakamahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘navasivathikā ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttā’’ti āha. Tasmā tassa matena dveyeva appanākammaṭṭhānāni, sesāni upacārakammaṭṭhānāni. Kiṃ panetesu sabbesu abhiniveso jāyatīti? Na jāyati. Iriyāpathasampajaññanīvaraṇabojjhaṅgesu hi abhiniveso na jāyati, sesesu jāyatīti. Mahāsīvatthero panāha ‘‘etesupi abhiniveso jāyati. Ayañhi ‘atthi nu kho me cattāro iriyāpathā udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me catusampajaññaṃ udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me pañcanīvaraṇā udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me sattabojjhaṅgā udāhu natthī’ti evaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Tasmā sabbattha abhiniveso jāyatī’’ti.
“比丘们,无论任何人”:比丘们,也就是无论比丘、比丘尼、近事男或近事女。“应当这样修习”等:应当依照从开头所说的修习次第来修习。“可以预期”:意思是值得期待、应当希求、必定会实现。“究竟智”:指阿拉汉果。“若还有余依时”:指还有剩余的执取,尚未完全断尽的时候。“不来果”:指不来者的境界。
Yo hi koci, bhikkhaveti yo hi koci, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā. Evaṃ bhāveyyātiādito paṭṭhāya vuttena bhāvanānukkamena bhāveyya. Pāṭikaṅkhanti paṭikaṅkhitabbaṃ icchitabbaṃ avassaṃbhāvīti attho. Aññāti arahattaṃ. Sati vā upādiseseti upādānasese vā sati aparikkhīṇe. Anāgāmitāti anāgāmibhāvo.
世尊这样以七年为限,显示了教法是导向出离的,接着又指出在比这更短的时间里也能成就,于是说“比丘们,且安住……”等语。这一切都是针对中等根器、堪受引导的人说的;至于利根者,则说“早上受教诫,傍晚就能证得殊胜;傍晚受教诫,早上就能证得殊胜”。世尊就这样开示“比丘们,我的教法就是如此导向出离的”,然后在二十一处以阿拉汉果为顶点,把所说的法义作总结,说道“比丘们,这是一条唯一的道路……乃至……以上就是依据这一点而说的”。其余的文句意思都很明白。说法结束时,有三万比丘证得阿拉汉果。
Evaṃ sattannaṃ vassānaṃ vasena sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassetvā puna tato appatarepi kāle dassento tiṭṭhantu, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Sabbampi cetaṃ majjhimassa veneyyapuggalassa vasena vuttaṃ, tikkhapaññaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘pātova anusiṭṭho sāyaṃ visesaṃ adhigamissati, sāyaṃ anusiṭṭho pāto visesaṃ adhigamissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Iti bhagavā ‘‘evaṃ niyyānikaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāsana’’nti dassetvā ekavīsatiyāpi ṭhānesu arahattanikūṭena desitaṃ desanaṃ niyyātento ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo…pe… iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti āha. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti. Desanāpariyosāne pana tiṃsa bhikkhusahassāni arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsūti.